HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
Transcript of HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 1/394
HR270SAP Learning Solution
Overview
mySAP Human Resources
Date
Training Center
Instructors
Education Website
Participant HandbookCourse Version: 2006/Q2
Course Duration: 5 Days
Material Number: 50083139
An SAP course - use it to learn, reference it for work
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 2/394
Copyright
Copyright © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose
without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed
without prior notice.
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software
components of other software vendors.
Trademarks
• Microsoft®, WINDOWS®, NT®, EXCEL®, Word®, PowerPoint® and SQL Server® are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• IBM®, DB2®, OS/2®, DB2/6000®, Parallel Sysplex®, MVS/ESA®, RS/6000®, AIX®,
S/390®, AS/400®, OS/390®, and OS/400® are registered trademarks of IBM Corporation.
• ORACLE® is a registered trademark of ORACLE Corporation.
• INFORMIX®-OnLine for SAP and INFORMIX® Dynamic ServerTM are registered
trademarks of Informix Software Incorporated.
• UNIX®, X/Open®, OSF/1®, and Motif® are registered trademarks of the Open Group.
• Citrix®, the Citrix logo, ICA®, Program Neighborhood®, MetaFrame®, WinFrame®,
VideoFrame®, MultiWin® and other Citrix product names referenced herein are trademarks
of Citrix Systems, Inc.
• HTML, DHTML, XML, XHTML are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World
Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology.
• JAVA® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
• JAVASCRIPT® is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for
technology invented and implemented by Netscape.
• SAP, SAP Logo, R/2, RIVA, R/3, SAP ArchiveLink, SAP Business Workflow, WebFlow, SAP
EarlyWatch, BAPI, SAPPHIRE, Management Cockpit, mySAP.com Logo and mySAP.com
are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries
all over the world. All other products mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
Disclaimer
THESE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED BY SAP ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND SAP EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR APPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THESE MATERIALS AND THE SERVICE,
INFORMATION, TEXT, GRAPHICS, LINKS, OR ANY OTHER MATERIALS AND PRODUCTSCONTAINED HEREIN. IN NO EVENT SHALL SAP BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST REVENUES OR LOST
PROFITS, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OF THESE MATERIALS OR INCLUDED
SOFTWARE COMPONENTS.
g20071239912
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 3/394
About This Handbook
This handbook is intended to complement the instructor-led presentation of this
course, and serve as a source of reference. It is not suitable for self-study.
Typographic Conventions
American English is the standard used in this handbook. The following
typographic conventions are also used.
Type Style Description
Example text Words or characters that appear on the screen. Theseinclude field names, screen titles, pushbuttons as well
as menu names, paths, and options.
Also used for cross-references to other documentation
both internal (in this documentation) and external (in
other locations, such as SAPNet).
Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text, titles of
graphics, and tables
EXAMPLE TEXT Names of elements in the system. These include
report names, program names, transaction codes, tablenames, and individual key words of a programming
language, when surrounded by body text, for example
SELECT and INCLUDE.
Example text Screen output. This includes file and directory names
and their paths, messages, names of variables and
parameters, and passages of the source text of a
program.
Example text Exact user entry. These are words and characters that
you enter in the system exactly as they appear in the
documentation.
<Example text> Variable user entry. Pointed brackets indicate that you
replace these words and characters with appropriate
entries.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. iii
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 4/394
About This Handbook HR270
Icons in Body Text
The following icons are used in this handbook.
Icon Meaning
For more information, tips, or background
Note or further explanation of previous point
Exception or caution
Procedures
Indicates that the item is displayed in the instructor's
presentation.
iv © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 5/394
Contents
Course Overview ....... ....... ....... ....... ....... ...... ....... ....... .. vii
Course Goals ....... ........ ........ ........ ........ ....... ........ .....viiCourse Objectives ... .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .... ... .... .... .vii
Unit 1: Introduction to SAP Learning Solution.. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 1
Introduction to the SAP Learning Solution........................... 2
Unit 2: Technical Essentials............................................11
System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution 600 ......... 12System Landscape of the SAP Learning Solution................ 22Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE.................... 25
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal ... .... ... .... ... .... ... ... .... ... .... ... .. 35
Learning Portal General Information .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 37Navigation.............. ........ ....... ........ ........ ....... ........ .. 46
Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal ................. 56Complete Training . .... ... .... .... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... .... 72
Learner Account....................................................... 77
Online Content Player .... .... .... .... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... ... 85
Offline Content Player .... .... .... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... .... 92
Unit 4: Organizational Management ... .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. .. 105
Organizational Management General Information. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .106Enterprise Structure in Organizational Management.. . . . . .. . .. . 114
Organizational Management and Workflow .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 118
Unit 5: Personnel Development ..................................... 127
SAP Personnel Development ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .128
Creating Scales/Qualifications Catalog ...........................132
Assigning Qualifications to a Person ... . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . . .. .136
Unit 6: Training Management ........................................ 145
Training Management General Information .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 146
Creating a Course Catalog .........................................156Creating Courses and Curricula ...................................170Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .175
Unit 7: Collaboration ... .... ... ... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... ... ... 189
Collaboration in the SAP Learning Portal.........................190
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. v
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 6/394
Contents HR270
Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management ................. 195
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics ............... 211Creating Content with the SAP Authoring Environment –
Basics.............................................................. 213
Structure of the Authoring Environment........................... 223User Interface for the SAP Authoring Environment ............. 228
Configuration .........................................................235
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing.. .. 257
Designing a Learning Net...........................................259
Integrating Your Own Content. .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .285Templates Manager .... ... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... .. 292
Learning Objectives Manager .. .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... .. .305Test Editor............. ........ ....... ........ ....... ........ ........ ..314
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – RepositoryExplorer ................................................................... 345
Playing Online/Offline ...............................................346
Repository Explorer..... ... .... .... .... .... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .349
Unit 11: Additional Information...................................... 371
Reporting with Business Intelligence .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 372
Correspondence in the SAP Learning Solution .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 381
vi © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 7/394
Course Overview
Target Audience
This course is intended for the following audiences:
• Training managers, training administrators
• Employees and consultants in HR departments that focus on Human Capital
Management (HCM) and are responsible for talent management, knowledge
management and personnel development.
• Authors and content owners
• Training administrators
Course Prerequisites
Required Knowledge
• HR050 Business Processes in Human Capital Management or HR100 Basics
of Personnel Administration and HR120 Essentials of Personnel Planning
• HR130 Essentials of SAP Enterprise Portal in HCM
Recommended Knowledge• HR515 Training and Event Management
Course Goals
This course will prepare you to:
• Gain an overview of the tasks and applications of the employee subgroups
involved in the learning cycle in the SAP Learning Solution
• Use the graphic illustration of the system landscape to outline the data flows
of the SAP Learning Solution
• Acquaint yourself with the functions of the Learning Portal, includingcollaboration, and the SAP Content Player
• Model the various delivery methods of blended training in SAP Training
Management
• Learn about the most important processes in content management and
creation with the SAP Authoring Environment
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. vii
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 8/394
Course Overview HR270
Course Objectives
After completing this course, you will be able to:
• Describe the business processes of (Blended) Training Management, the
Learning Portal and the Authoring Environment
• Define the structure of the SAP Learning Solution and the interplay between
the various components
viii © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 9/394
Unit 1Introduction to SAP Learning Solution
Unit Overview
Introduction to SAP Learning Solution
You will receive a general overview of the topics covered in the course.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Place the functions of the SAP Learning Solution in an overall context.
Unit Contents
Lesson: Introduction to the SAP Learning Solution ...........................2Exercise 1: Blended Learning for SAP LS? (Optional) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .7
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 1
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 10/394
Unit 1: Introduction to SAP Learning Solution HR270
Lesson: Introduction to the SAP Learning Solution
Lesson Overview
Participants receive a general overview of the SAP Learning Solution.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Place the functions of the SAP Learning Solution in an overall context.
Business Example
The management want to offer the employees in your company training andeducation opportunities on an integrated learning platform with a blended learning
offering. It is your job to evaluate the advantages of such a learning platform.
Introducing the SAP Learning Solution
The SAP Learning Solution offers an all-round training and education solution
to satisfy customers' demands for a complete system structure. By establishing
e-learning as an integral part of the modern training catalog, the SAP Learning
Solution has shown itself to be a logical, extensive enhancement to the previous
SAP Training and Event Management functions. SAP worked on developing an
all-round solution right from the start: Learning (Content) Management System
(LMS or LCMS), learning platform, learning portal, … – however you choose
to define these terms and whatever solutions they include, the SAP Learning
Solution incorporates all their functions.
In this respect, SAP stands out from other providers, who have developed their
solutions gradually out of one application (e.g. CMS or content providers). This is
probably one of the main reasons why SAP was one of the first ERP providers to
decide to develop its own solution in full. The advantages of this for customers
of the SAP Learning Solution are two-fold: the high quality SAP development
standards of the entire product suite are guaranteed in the SAP Learning Solution
as well, and customers are ensured global 24/7 support. To facilitate participants'
understanding of the overview course, there is a brief explanation of the core
e-learning terminology. In addition, the introduction gives a short explanation of
the roles used in SAP Learning Solution.
E-Learning
E-Learning – that is, learning using interactive instructional material that can
be accessed on the Internet or intranet. Modern e-learning is accompanied by
tutorials (e-mails, discussion groups, ...) and is combined with traditional teaching
2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 11/394
HR270 Lesson: Introduction to the SAP Learning Solution
forms (“Blended Learning”). It has not revolutionized the training sector, but
it is assuming an ever more important role in large enterprises thanks to the
increasingly high quality of the e-learning content on offer.
From the multitude of new terms that has emerged in the world of e-learning,
we will define only the most important here (see list). Please note that the term
curriculum is used in the Learning Solution to refer to a collection of courses,
that is, a course package. A curriculum in the Learning Solution represents a
Blended Solution.
• [E-Learning]
A blanket term for computer-aided instructional programs made available
via public networks, intranet and Internet.
• [Blended Learning]
Combination of traditional“ face-to-face” courses and e-learning units.
• [CBT], [WBT]
– Computer Based Training with the help of special (interactive or
multimedia) learning software.
– Web Based Training calls these learning units via Internet or intranet,
and is also supported by collaboration (e-mail, discussion groups), if
necessary.
Implemented in the right way, e-learning can help achieve increased sales
(“time-to-market ”= “time-to-revenue”), reduce costs (travel and administrativecosts, opportunity costs), provide more efficient training and education, and
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 3
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 12/394
Unit 1: Introduction to SAP Learning Solution HR270
enhance the image of a company. Its implementation needs to be well-planned
and supported so that inexperienced learners in particular are not overwhelmed by
having to take on too much responsiblilty for their own professional development.
• Increased sales
– “Know-how” as a commodity
– Enhancement of the service offering
– Swifter and better-targeted knowledge transfer
• Cost reduction
– Travel and administration costs
– Opportunity costs
• More efficient internal education and training
– Flexible learning
– Integration of learning and working
• Image enhancement
– Innovation through new technologies
– Hybrid teaching and learning concepts
Roles in the SAP Learning Solution
The SAP Learning Solution offers an all-round “problem-free” solution in contrast
to the stand-alone products commonly implemented as e-learning pilot projectsin many companies. The integration of training administration and personnel
development in particular constitutes a definite success factor in the area of
e-learning.
Role Component: SAP LS
Learner Learning Portal
Training administrator Training Management
Personnel development manager Personnel Development, Organizational
Management
Author Authoring Environment
Trainer Learning Portal
4 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 13/394
HR270 Lesson: Introduction to the SAP Learning Solution
Practically every role profits from the SAP Learning Solution:
• Users: have direct access to their training activities and a widerangingcourse offering that is tailored exactly to their specific qualification gaps
(based on their job requirements). Users can register for courses themselves,
submit participation requests for approval, and most importantly work on
e-learning courses directly for this single-point-of-entry.
• The Training Administrator: can manage and administer all courses and
participants in SAP TEM and take account of combination options with
e-learning measures and collaboration tools.
• Personnel Development Manager: Skills management has direct access to
an up-to-date database that is automatically maintained. Training measures
can be implemented swiftly and target group-oriented to support the
systematic development of personnel resources.• Trainers (teletutors): The deployment of instructors can be optimized in
Training Administration - for example, checking availability and potential
replacements. The possibility of assessing courses and participants
automatically and online significantly reduces the administrative effort
required. Teletutors can provide constant assistance by supporting the course
participants in the collaboration room.
• Learning software designers: The Authoring Environment can be used to
design and create learning objects that can be reused and updated as required.
Version management functions prevent version conflicts. External content
offerings can be integrated according to recognized standards.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 5
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 14/394
Unit 1: Introduction to SAP Learning Solution HR270
6 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 15/394
HR270 Lesson: Introduction to the SAP Learning Solution
Exercise 1: Blended Learning for SAP LS?
(Optional)Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Discuss various aspects of e-learning as a component of blended learning,
based on a specific example.
Business Example
You want your employees to get to know the SAP Learning Solution in a blended
learning course and are considering whether or not the animations that you have
received from SAP Sales are suitable for this purpose.
Task 1:
1. Start the corresponding Sales demo (Information Kit under the SAP Learning
Solution program) and briefly discuss the roles shown in the product
demonstration. For testing purposes, working with sound is not important
to you.
Task 2:
You are an e-learning specialist who is responsible for setting up course HR270 -
SAP Learning Solution Overview Course - as a blended learning course for your
company. One of your colleagues proposes that the exercise you just performed
can be used as an e-learning component exactly the way it is.
1. Discuss this approach with the other course participants.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 7
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 16/394
Unit 1: Introduction to SAP Learning Solution HR270
Solution 1: Blended Learning for SAP LS?
(Optional)Task 1:
1. Start the corresponding Sales demo (Information Kit under the SAP Learning
Solution program) and briefly discuss the roles shown in the product
demonstration. For testing purposes, working with sound is not important
to you.
a) Start the program with Start - Programs - SAP Learning Solution -
Information Kit. If you use the WTS, sound will not be available; click
"No" when prompted to do so.
In the next menu, you will find the various roles of the SAP Learning
Solution in the Product Demonstration tab, and can also navigate
through this information.
Task 2:
You are an e-learning specialist who is responsible for setting up course HR270 -
SAP Learning Solution Overview Course - as a blended learning course for your
company. One of your colleagues proposes that the exercise you just performed
can be used as an e-learning component exactly the way it is.
1. Discuss this approach with the other course participants.
a) Points that could be mentioned in a discussion:
• A sales demo is not a (good) CBT. There is precious little
interaction, nor are there any learning progress checks for the
learner.
• Does it make sense to go through the e-learning unit in the
classroom at a fixed time when using a blended approach? This
approach will probably be much less effective than offering it to
the participants beforehand as a self-learning unit in a learning
portal.
• A common benefit of e-learning is that content is kept up to
date thanks to centralized administration. You should therefore
consider updating the demo to release LSO 600.
• Learners should be given an opportunity to check their learning
progress.
• ...
8 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 17/394
HR270 Lesson: Introduction to the SAP Learning Solution
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Place the functions of the SAP Learning Solution in an overall context.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 9
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 18/394
Unit Summary HR270
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Place the functions of the SAP Learning Solution in an overall context.
10 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 19/394
Unit 2 Technical Essentials
Unit Overview
Participants receive an overview of the different system units that are affected by
the SAP Learning Solution installation.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Describe the system architecture of the SAP Learning Solution
• Explain how and why the individual components of the SAP Learning
Solution communicate with one another
• Identify and describe the system landscape options for the SAP Learning
Solution
• Explain the integration options for older SAP HR Systems with the SAP
Learning Solution by means of ALE.
Unit Contents
Lesson: System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution 600 ... .. . . . .. 12Lesson: System Landscape of the SAP Learning Solution ................ 22
Lesson: Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 25Exercise 2: The Relationship Between a Portal User and the
Corresponding SAP HR Employee Master Data (User Mapping)..... 27
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 11
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 20/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
Lesson: System Architecture of the SAP Learning
Solution 600
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, you learn about the system architecture of the SAP Learning
Solution and about the components that the solution contains.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe the system architecture of the SAP Learning Solution
• Explain how and why the individual components of the SAP LearningSolution communicate with one another
Business Example
You are a training administrator involved in evaluating a Learning Management
System. In this context, you have to understand the system architecture and how it
can be integrated with your existing system landscape.
The System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution
Figure 1: The SAP Learning Solution in mySAP ERP
12 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 21/394
HR270 Lesson: System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution 600
The architecture of the SAP Learning Solution is comprised of the following
components:
• SAP Learning Portal
• SAP ERP 2005 Backend + Web Application Server (WAS)
• SAP LS Authoring Environment (LSOAE 600)
• Content Management System (CMS EP)
• SAP LS Content Player (LSOCP 600)
The releases for LSO 600 are shown in the above diagram.
Hint: Please note: In LSO 600 and later, the SAP Learning Solution no
longer appears as an add-on for Training Management; instead, it can
be activated as an extension set.
Figure 2: Architecture – SAP Learning Solution
The data transfer between these two components plays a decisive role.
Specifically, these components are linked by standard connections. Each of these
components is introduced below.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 13
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 22/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
SAP Learning Portal
Figure 3: The Learning Portal in the Overall Scenario
The Learning Portal for the SAP Learning Solution is usually a “view” of an
enterprise portal in a company's intranet.
Portals (General)
14 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 23/394
HR270 Lesson: System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution 600
Figure 4: Portal
Portals make data from multiple sources (databases, systems) available
dynamically in user-specific form. Access to the data is usually controlled by
one-time authentication of the user.
The corporate learning offering is accessible to all employees – and possibly to
external course participants as well – through the Learning Portal for the SAPLearning Solution.
Note to the instructor:
The following display and accessibility options are available:
• Embedding in the corporate intranet
• As a component (iView) of the SAP Enterprise Portal
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 15
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 24/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
The learner's personalized data (Learner Account) is displayed in the Learning
Portal. The following self-service applications are available for the SAP Learning
Solution:
• Search the entire course catalog
• Book courses
• Cancel course bookings
• Launch e-learning courses
• Call training history
• View personal qualifications profile
• Run personal profile matchup
• Use collaboration options such as discussion forums, chat rooms, and virtual
team roomsThe Learning Portal transfers the data from the back end and, if necessary, starts
the Content Player to play the electronic content
SAP ERP2005 Back End
Figure 5: ERP2005 Back End in the Overall Scenario
16 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 25/394
HR270 Lesson: System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution 600
The ERP2005 back end is the workplace of the training administrator or
coordinator. It is the physical repository for the data that is displayed in the
Learning Portal. It contains:
• The course catalog and its environment data
• Course schedule and booking management functions
• The complete training history of the learner
• Data from Personnel Development and Personnel Administration (where
implemented)
• Data from the Enterprise and Process Organization (where implemented)
The role of the following components in the ERP2005 back end is important to
enable this data to be mapped in the SAP Learning Solution:
• Organizational Management
• Personnel Administration
• Personnel Development
• Training Management
If a company already uses SAP Training and Event Management to manage its
classroom training, the data from this system can be transferred to the Learning
Solution. You can transfer:
• The course catalog containing classroom training courses
• The training history
• Resources (e.g. instructors/trainers, rooms and so on) and other data in theenvironment
• External persons attending classroom training (persons without personnel
numbers in Personnel Administration)
• External training providers (companies)
• External instructors
When you use the SAP Learning Solution, it does not make sense to continue
using SAP Training and Event Management. You are recommended not to do so.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 17
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 26/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
SAP LS Authoring Environment
Figure 6: The Authoring Environment in the Overall Scenario
The Authoring Environment is the most important application in the SAP Learning
Solution for authors and instructional designers.
The Authoring Environment is a locally installed tool on the author's clients that
can be used to create structured e-learning content with metadata appended.
Content of external providers (such as Digital Think, English Town, NetG or
Skillsoft) can be integrated in the Authoring Environment, provided the content
is SCORM 1.1 or SCORM 1.2 compliant. Proprietary formats and standards
can be implemented manually.
Authors can configure the local Authoring Environment to allow them to integrate
external content creation tools such as Toolbook or Dreamweaver for use in the
Authoring Environment.
The Authoring Environment includes an editor for creating online tests.When content has been created, it can be stored centrally in the Content
Management System. Other authors have access to content stored in the CMS,
which they can use and modify as required.
Before content can be released for Training Management, it must be published.
Then it is also available in the Publisher Database in the ERP2005 back end,
where it can be linked with a course type.
18 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 27/394
HR270 Lesson: System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution 600
As soon as content has been linked with a course type, the course (WBT) is
available to the learner in the Learning Portal. The course can be started using the
Content Player (display medium for e-learning in the SAP Learning Solution).
Content Management System
Figure 7: The Content Management System in the Overall Scenario
A Content Managment System (CMS) is a central repository for finished
e-learning course content.
The following systems can be used as CMS:
• Any “state of the art” content management system, such as CM for the SAP
Enterprise Portal (standard component)
• A Web server that is WEBDav Level 2-enabled, for example, an Apache
server
The training administrator can link content that is published in the CMS with acourse type. Linking is done in the ERP2005 back end in the Publisher Database.
This is a database table which displays all learning content published in the CMS.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 19
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 28/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
SAP LS Content Player
Figure 8: The Content Player in the Overall Scenario
The SAP LS Content Player is a tool for displaying and playing e-learning content
that has been transferred to and published in the Content Management System.
When a learner launches a Web Based Training in the SAP Learning Portal, the
content is displayed in the Content Player.
The Content Player provides multiple navigation options for course content. It
is responsible for writing the learner's progress to the Learner Account in the
back end on completion of the course.
In turn, this data is taken directly from the portal, so that users know at all times
what percentage of the WBTs they have already completed and how much time
they spent doing so. This guarantees that when the Content Player is opened, the
course is resumed at the exact point at which the learner left off last time.
20 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 29/394
HR270 Lesson: System Architecture of the SAP Learning Solution 600
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Describe the system architecture of the SAP Learning Solution
• Explain how and why the individual components of the SAP Learning
Solution communicate with one another
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 21
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 30/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
Lesson: System Landscape of the SAP Learning
Solution
Lesson Overview
The participants are given an overview of the system landscape of the SAP
Learning Solution.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Identify and describe the system landscape options for the SAP Learning
Solution
Business Example
You are a training administrator involved in evaluating a Learning Management
System. As part of your job, you also want to learn about how a system landscape
for a Learning Management System (LMS) could look that makes full use of the
existing data in your ERP HR system.
System Landscape
The SAP Learning Solution allows customers to set up a system landscape to suit
their requirements. Generally speaking, SAP recommends customers to install theEnterprise Portal and/or the Content Management System on a separate machine.
For this reason, this system is not included in the following sections dealing with
installation options.
22 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 31/394
HR270 Lesson: System Landscape of the SAP Learning Solution
Figure 9: System Landscape – SAP Learning Solution
• Option 1:
With this option, all components are installed on one specific machine. The
advantage of this is that it reduces initial costs. Such a system landscape is
particularly suitable for test systems or smaller installations. An important
security aspect here is the question of whether sensitive data is being storedor whether the system can be accessed from the Internet.
• Option 2:
A second option is to install the Content Player and the LSO front end
component on a separate WebAS (Web Application Server) on a separate
machine. The LSO back-end system is installed separately. The advantage
of this is that there are two machines to carry the burden, which means
improved system performance. This type of installation lets you set up a
firewall between the two systems for increased security.
• Option 3:
With option 3, the Content Player, the LSO front-end component and theLSO back end are each installed on separate machines. Security aspects
play a role here and, more importantly, performance improves thanks to the
further distribution of tasks.
Ultimately, however, each administrator will have to optimize the three major
aspects of security, performance, and costs. The final decision will depend mainly
on the enterprise's specific requirements.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 23
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 32/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Identify and describe the system landscape options for the SAP Learning
Solution
24 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 33/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE
Lesson: Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE
Lesson Overview
The participants are given a brief overview of the integration options for older HR
Systems with the SAP Learning Solution.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain the integration options for older SAP HR Systems with the SAP
Learning Solution by means of ALE.
Business Example
You are a training administrator involved in evaluating a Learning Management
System. For this reason, you want to find out what options there are for integrating
SAP HR systems from other releases or secure areas with the SAP Learning
Solution.
Differences Between Releases – ALE
Figure 10: Integrating an SAP HR System with ALE
If your enterprise already uses an SAP HR system and you do not plan to upgrade
to Release ERP 2005, you can still integrate existing HR data (such as HR master
data and organizational data) with the SAP Learning Solution. In this case, the
required data is regularly transferred from the HR system to the SAP Learning
Solution system using ALE (Application Link Enabling). Data, such as a learner's
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 25
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 34/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
acquired qualifications, can also be written back to the HR system with ALE. For
the sake of consistency, it must be absolutely clear which system is the leading one.
You should enter the original data, such as HR master data entries, in this system.
ALE (Application Link Enabling) is the standard connection for transferring data
between SAP systems. It is used at many companies, for example, to exchange
data between the FI/CO systems and the HR system, which is often installed
separately for security reasons.
26 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 35/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE
Exercise 2: The Relationship Between a
Portal User and the Corresponding SAPHR Employee Master Data (User Mapping)
Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Explain from a technical perspective how the Learning Portal manages to
dynamically display the correct employee data from the ERP2005 back end
when a user logs on to the portal, purely on the basis of the user-specific
logon.
Business Example
Hint: To carry out this exercise, log on to the portal , the “Learning
Solution front end”. Use your browser and the URL provided by the
instructor in order to log on.
In the exercises, use “##” as your user number, that is, the digits that
appear after “HR270-”.
Caution: You will learn about the functions available in the Learning
Portal in the next unit. To perform the exercises without difficulty, it isimportant that you perform one action only, namely to click on the link as
shown in the graphic.
Hint: You carry out this exercise in the ERP2005 back end of the IDES
training system, the “Learning Solution back end”. To log on, choose
Start/Programs/SAP Logon.
In the exercises, use “##” as your user number, that is, the digits that
appear after “HR270-”.
Make sure that you log on to the back end in the language of your choice.
As the project manager for system administration, you are responsible for your
portal's user interfaces and directory. You want to understand the consequences
of implementing SAP LS. As well as the required workplace equipment, you are
particularly interested in the interaction between the portal users and the personnel
data. The latter is stored in the familiar SAP HR module at your company.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 27
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 36/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
Task 1:
Which software/interface do the following roles use primarily to access the
applications of the SAP Learning Solution?
1. Web-Based Training authors
2. Training administrators
3. Learners
Task 2:
Optional: You are trying to understand the interface between the portal user and
the employee that is maintained in Personnel Administration (PA) in mySAP HR.
1.
Figure 11: Follow the link to the detailed view of the course
After you have logged on, open the Learning Portal from the “Learner” tab. By
clicking on the Product Training activity (you can see your portal user in the
top left corner of the screen) as shown in the illustration, you can see a list
of the employees (object type Person in PA) who are booked on “your”
Product Training course. It is easy to guess which employee is assigned to
your portal user.
Continued on next page
28 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 37/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE
You know from your HR basics course that you can use transaction PA20
to display the persons in Personnel Administration. Check the infotype 105
“Communication” for the corresponding person.
Name:
First Name:
Personnel Number:
Caution: You have just identified “yourself” as the employee. It
is safe to assume that you will need your personnel number on a
number of occasions throughout this course.
2. You now know that the person in SAP HR who is assigned to your system
user is already booked on the above course.
Does this mean that if you use the same user to book yourself on a different
course in the next lesson, the same person appears in the back end with an
additional course participation entry?
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 29
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 38/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
Solution 2: The Relationship Between a
Portal User and the Corresponding SAPHR Employee Master Data (User Mapping)
Task 1:
Which software/interface do the following roles use primarily to access the
applications of the SAP Learning Solution?
1. Web-Based Training authors
a) SAP Authoring Environment
2. Training administrators
a) SAP GUI
3. Learners
a) Browser
Task 2:
Optional: You are trying to understand the interface between the portal user and
the employee that is maintained in Personnel Administration (PA) in mySAP HR.
1.
Continued on next page
30 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 39/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE
Figure 12: Follow the link to the detailed view of the course
After you have logged on, open the Learning Portal from the “Learner” tab. By
clicking on the Product Training activity (you can see your portal user in the
top left corner of the screen) as shown in the illustration, you can see a listof the employees (object type Person in PA) who are booked on “your”
Product Training course. It is easy to guess which employee is assigned to
your portal user.
You know from your HR basics course that you can use transaction PA20
to display the persons in Personnel Administration. Check the infotype 105
“Communication” for the corresponding person.
Name:
First Name:
Personnel Number:
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 31
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 40/394
Unit 2: Technical Essentials HR270
Caution: You have just identified “yourself” as the employee. It
is safe to assume that you will need your personnel number on anumber of occasions throughout this course.
a) User Mapping – Personnel Administration
Log on to the portal and click on the Product Training link. A “Cancel
Participation” button appears next to the name of a participant in the
list of participants. You assume that you can only cancel your own
participation in a course in the Learning Portal. You immediately
recognize that this participant is the one who is assigned to your portal
user in the SAP HR back end.
Transaction PA20
Click on the F4 search help and enter the name of the participant
against which the “Cancel Participation” button appears.
Enter “Communication” as the infotype and choose “Display” (icon
or press F7). Check whether your system user is actually assigned to
this “personnel number”. If so, note the person's master data. If not, try
again with a different last name.
2. You now know that the person in SAP HR who is assigned to your system
user is already booked on the above course.
Does this mean that if you use the same user to book yourself on a different
course in the next lesson, the same person appears in the back end with anadditional course participation entry?
a) Yes!
In Training Management, employees (the persons) are usually booked
for courses.
The user mapping is then exact and unique across the chain you just
verified: portal user = back end user = person (infotype 105).
32 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 41/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Separate SAP HR Systems – ALE
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Explain the integration options for older SAP HR Systems with the SAP
Learning Solution by means of ALE.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 33
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 42/394
Unit Summary HR270
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Describe the system architecture of the SAP Learning Solution
• Explain how and why the individual components of the SAP Learning
Solution communicate with one another
• Identify and describe the system landscape options for the SAP Learning
Solution
• Explain the integration options for older SAP HR Systems with the SAP
Learning Solution by means of ALE.
34 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 43/394
Unit 3 SAP Learning Portal
Unit Overview
Participants receive an overview of the Portal iView of the SAP Learning Solutionand its functions.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Explain and execute the business process of the Learning Portal
• Describe data exchange with back end components
• Execute a simple search
• Execute an extended search
• Navigate through the course catalog overview
• Find more detailed information and find courses covering a particular subject
area
• Add a subject area to your favorites
• Add a course to your favorites
• Find the exact dates scheduled for a course
• Make a prebooking for a course
• Book a curriculum
• Book a course (classroom training, e-learning unit)
• Cancel a course booking• Cancel a curriculum booking
• Submit a participation request
• Submit a booking cancellation request
• Appraise a course
• Electronically confirm participation (FDA signature)
• Book courses in the SAP Learning Portal and cancel bookings
• Describe how booking or canceling a curriculum affects the individual
courses
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 35
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 44/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
• Explain how standard workflows support an approval process for bookings
and cancellations
• Differentiate between workflows on the basis of different course types
• Name at least two important course follow-up activities for learners
• Describe how the Learning Portal makes these follow-up activities easier
• Display and delete learner-specific prebookings
• Display and delete learner favorites
• Display learner's qualification profile
• Run personal profile matchup
• Save learner-specific settings, for example, for a learning strategy or search
options
• Start a booked Web Based Training (WBT) online
• Navigate to the Content Player
• Display a table of contents or defined learning path for a WBT
• Complete processing of a WBT and check your learning progress in the protal
• Start a booked online test
• Define the cycle that the Offline Player enables, and how it makes it possible
to download content for offline learning, yet still notify the central LMS of
the learning progress.
Unit Contents
Lesson: Learning Portal General Information. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 37Lesson: Navigation .............................................................. 46
Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal.................. 56Lesson: Complete Training .... .... .... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... ... .... ... .. 72
Lesson: Learner Account .. .... .... .... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... .... .... .... 77Lesson: Online Content Player ................................................ 85
Lesson: Offline Content Player.... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... . 92Exercise 3: The SAP Learning Solution for End Users................. 95
36 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 45/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Portal General Information
Lesson: Learning Portal General Information
Lesson Overview
Introduction to the Learning Portal of the SAP Learning Solution
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain and execute the business process of the Learning Portal
• Describe data exchange with back end components
Business ExampleYou are a learner who wants to get an initial, basic impression of the new mode of
access to Corporate University offerings. You want to find out about the structure
of the portal and what functions it offers learners.
Learning Portal General Information
The Learning Portal is literally the face of the Learning Solution. It represents that
part of the SAP LS with which the learner or employee in a company comes into
contact. It offers a wide variety of options for all aspects of training and further
education, tailored to the needs and requirements of the respective learner.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 37
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 46/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
The Learning Portal in the SAP Learning Solution /Data Exchange with the ERP 2005 Back End
Figure 13: The Learning Portal in the Overall Scenario
As explained in the chapter Technical Essentials, companies can use the Learning
Portal in the following ways:
1. The Learning Portal can be integrated in an SAP Enterprise Portal 6.0 or
higher.
2. The Learning Portal can operate as a standalone solution, for example,
within the respective intranet.
In both cases, the learner must identify him- or herself by means of a user ID
and a password at logon. The user is presented with a personalized view of
all information relating to training and education. Personalized means that, in
addition to general training information, users also have access to information
38 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 47/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Portal General Information
about their own training activities and about courses they need to take. When the
user logs on, the system retrieves personal information about the learner from
the ERP2005 back end. This includes:
• Learners' personal data (last name, first name and so on) - SAP Personnel
Administration
• Learners' organizational assignment data (position, job) - SAP Organizational
Management
• Learners' special authorizations (to view course catalog) - SAP Structural
Authorizations
• Training Activities - Learner Account/ SAP Training Management
• Learner's Prebookings - Learner Account/ SAP Training Management
• My Favorites - Learner Account/ SAP Training Management
• Learner's Qualifications Profile - SAP Personnel Development
• Requirements of Learner's Position or Job - SAP Personnel Development
• Learner's Personal Settings - Learner Account/ SAP Training Management
• Learning Progress - Learner Account/ SAP Training Management
• Courses Prescribed as Mandatory for the Learner – SAP Training
Management
• Essential requirements/qualifications of the learner's position that are
missing, expiring, or whose proficiency is inadequate - SAP Personnel
Development
All of this information is retrieved from various components of the ERP2005 back
end and displayed to the learner in the personalized Learning Portal or included in
the Learner Account.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 39
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 48/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Self-Services in the Learning Portal
Depending upon the defaults and settings made, there are a number of self-service
applications available to the learner in the Learning Portal:
• Use search functions for the course catalog
• Identify prescribed courses
• Book courses (classroom training, WBT, curriculum and so on)
• Cancel course bookings
• Make prebookings
• Create personal favorites
• Appraise courses
• Call WBT content
• Specify learning strategy for playing WBT
• Play content offline and online
• View personal qualification profile
• Run personal profile matchup
• Identify qualification deficits
• Store personal settings for learning strategy and search options
• View current training activities
• View completed courses (history)
The following chapters deal with these components and data in more detail and
explain how to maintain this data.
40 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 49/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Portal General Information
Structure of Learning Portal
Figure 14: View of Learning Portal
From a user perspective, the Learning Portal comprises two areas:
1. The left frame serves as a navigation bar for orientation purposes. Its
appearance remains constant. The links it contains call information, which is
then displayed in the area to the right.
2. In the center frame, information or applications are displayed when called
using the links in the navigation frame.
These two areas interact directly with one another. They are discussed in detail
in the next lesson, “Navigation”, using the individual functions available in the
navigation bar as a basis. For now, concentrate on what learners see when they
start the Learning Portal.
Training Home
The Training Homepage is the initial screen of the Learning Portal. To return to
this start page from anywhere in the portal, learners simply click the “TrainingHome” link in the Navigation area of the Learning Portal. The display area
contains the most important information for the user:
• Messages and notes that are relevant for the learner
• The learner's current training activities
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 41
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 50/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Figure 15: Messages and Notes
In the Messages and Notes area, important Personnel Development data is
displayed. In the standard system, such data includes courses prescribed for the
learner and missing qualifications.
In the Mandatory Courses area, learners are shown all courses that are prescribed
as mandatory for them. This is purely for information purposes. It is the learner's
responsibility to book the course. As soon as a mandatory course has been booked,
it is no longer displayed in this area. It then appears under the current training
activities. The display of mandatory courses is derived from relationships that are
maintained in Training Management and that access the employee's assignment in
Organizational Management.
42 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 51/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Portal General Information
Figure 16: Missing or Expiring Mandatory Qualifications
In the standard system, the Qualifications area lists all the essential qualifications
…
• ... that are lacking completely
• ... that are only partially represented
• ... that will expire in the near future.
Figure 17: Current Training Activities
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 43
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 52/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
In the current training activities area, the learner can find all the relevant
information about:
• Booked time-dependent courses (such as classroom training, curricula)
– Course name
– Start date
– Start time
– End date
– End time
– Course location
– Whether a course is part of a curriculum
• Requests for participation in time-dependent courses
– Course name
– Start date
– Start time
– End date
– End time
– Course location
– Whether a course is part of a curriculum
– Information about the request
• Booked time-independent courses (such as Web-Based Training, online test)
– Course name
– License period
– Number of allowed accesses
– Progress in %
– Completion time
– If already available, a link to start the course
– Whether a course is part of a curriculum
• Requests for participation in time-independent courses
– Course name
– License period
– Number of allowed accesses
– Progress in %
– Completion time
– Whether a course is part of a curriculum
– Information about the request
44 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 53/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Portal General Information
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Explain and execute the business process of the Learning Portal
• Describe data exchange with back end components
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 45
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 54/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Lesson: Navigation
Lesson Overview
Participants learn how to navigate the Learning Portal.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Execute a simple search
• Execute an extended search
• Navigate through the course catalog overview
• Find more detailed information and find courses covering a particular subjectarea
• Add a subject area to your favorites
• Add a course to your favorites
• Find the exact dates scheduled for a course
• Make a prebooking for a course
• Book a curriculum
• Book a course (classroom training, e-learning unit)
• Cancel a course booking
• Cancel a curriculum booking
• Submit a participation request
• Submit a booking cancellation request
• Appraise a course
• Electronically confirm participation (FDA signature)
Business Example
You are a learner and have just logged onto your personalized Learning Portal.
You are interested in the entire upper left screen area, the navigation area.
As a learner, you want to find out what processes are supported in the navigation
area and what information it contains. You want to get to know the various searchoptions in the Learning Portal and learn more about the booking and canceling
operations.
46 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 55/394
HR270 Lesson: Navigation
Navigation
Figure 18: Navigation
The Navigation screen area is divided up as follows:
1. Training Home
2. Find
3. Top 3 List (BAdI)
4. Course Catalog
5. Learner-specific Learner Account
These areas are described in detail in the following sections.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 47
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 56/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Find
Figure 19: Search Course Catalog
Learners can use the search functions in the Navigation area to search the course
catalog for courses using keywords or specific attributes as search criteria. The
system returns the hit list based on these search criteria. The learner can branch to
the details page of a course directly from the hit list to display further information.The search functions offer:
• A simple search (keyword search):
With the simple/keyword search option in the Learning Portal, the learner
can enter a keyword to search the course catalog for suitable courses. The
keyword can be contained in the course title or description.
• Extended search
The extended search function can be accessed via the link displayed below
the simple search. This option offers multiple course attributes that the
learner can specify as search criteria.
48 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 57/394
HR270 Lesson: Navigation
Figure 20: Extended search
1. The learner can execute a keyword search on both the course title and the
title and associated description texts (such as content, objectives, notes and
so on). These attributes are maintained and stored in the ERP2005 Training
Management at course groups and course types level.
2. Option to display all training measures from a given subject area. Subjectareas are also defined in Training Management for the the ERP2005 back
end system at course group level.
3. Learners can display all possible courses offered with their preferred delivery
method (classroom training, Web-Based Training or Virtual Classroom).
Delivery methods are defined in Customizing for Training Management
in the ERP2005 back end system.
4. In Training Management for the ERP2005 back end system, qualifications
can be defined as prerequisites for participation in a course at course type
level. Learners can display a list of all possible or bookable courses that have
a given prerequisite qualification.
5. A learner that needs to acquire a given qualification can display a list of all
courses that impart the qualification. This relationship is also defined in
Training Management (see explanation 4).
6. Learners can display all courses that are intended for a given target audience.
This assignment is created in Training Management in the ERP2005 back
end system using the optional relationships “planned for job” …
7. …and “is mandatory for job / position / organization”.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 49
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 58/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
BAdI
The third navigation frame usually contains the Top Three list of most frequently
booked courses. However, it can easily be filled with other information by means
of a standard interface (BAdI).
Course Catalog (General)
Figure 21: Course Catalog Overview
In the Course Catalog area, learners can view all of the courses offered by the
Training Department.
You maintain and store the course catalog in the Training Management master data
catalog in the back end system. Here you also select and flag the subject areas that
should be displayed in the Navigation area of the portal. As a rule, this is a very
general categorization, for example, Languages, IT, Business, or Personal Skills.
If you do not flag any course groups as subject areas, the system automatically
displays all the course groups at the uppermost level of the catalog hierarchy.
50 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 59/394
HR270 Lesson: Navigation
Figure 22: Display of Course Catalog
Course Catalog
When you click the Course Catalog link, an overview of the entire catalog
appears, in which you can choose the individual subject areas. From the
perspective of the back end system, a hierarchy of the various course groups is
presented. The learner can access the complete course catalog by clicking the
subject area links displayed. Alternatively, the learner can go directly to the toplevel list, which shows the entire catalog.
Subject Areas
The subject area link gives the learner access to the corresponding details page.
As well as a general description of the subject area, the details page provides
information about subject areas assigned at a lower level, and about the courses
that are included in this subject area. It also contains information about the
delivery methods (e.g. classroom training, Web-Based Training, online test, or
curriculum) offered for the course.
Learners can add a subject area to their favorites by clicking “Add Subject Area
to Favorites” (see Learner Account unit). The learner can navigate through thecatalog by clicking on the underlying subject areas and courses.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 51
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 60/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Figure 23: Detail Screen of a Subject Area
You can click on a subject area to display detailed information for that area. This
information generally includes:
• A brief description of the area
• A list of the subordinate subject areas (with links)
• A list of courses and their delivery methods (with links)
Courses in the Learning Portal
The learner accesses specific course offerings using the search function or by
navigating through the subject areas. These are categorized according to delivery
method, either time-dependent or time-independent:
Time-dependent Time-independent
Classroom training Web-Based Training
Curriculum (Blended Learning) Online test
Virtual Classroom Session CBT (e.g. via CD ROM)
The detailed data displayed for each course depends on whether it is a
time-dependent or a time-independent course. WBTs contain information about
the minimum or maximum completion time, while classroom training courses
contain location information.
The following information is displayed:
• Time-independent course:
52 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 61/394
HR270 Lesson: Navigation
– Status messages about current operations (bookings, prebookings,
and so on)
– Course content
– Notes
– Course duration
– Target group
– Prerequisites (qualifications required or prerequisite courses taken)
– Attainable qualifications
– Follow-up courses
– Fees (participation price)
– Languages offered (languages in which the course is available)
– Training provider – Course owner (The name of the course owner is displayed. If the
e-mail address is stored in HR Personnel Administration, the mail
application opens when you click the name and you can send the course
owner a mail.)
– References to further sources of information (e.g. link to a homepage)
– Knowledge Links (to documents or information stored in the
Knowledge Warehouse component)
• Time-dependent course:
– Status messages about current operations and course content
– Notes – Course duration
– Target group
– Prerequisites
– Attainable qualifications
– Follow-up courses
– Fee
– Course owner
– Training provider
– Course dates – Schedule
– Language
– Location
– Participants
– Trainer
– Room
– Course dates
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 53
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 62/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
– Links to further information
– Knowledge Link
Training administrators determine which information – and how much – learners
can see on the detail screen of the course when they maintain this data in ERP2005
Training Management.
54 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 63/394
HR270 Lesson: Navigation
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Execute a simple search
• Execute an extended search
• Navigate through the course catalog overview
• Find more detailed information and find courses covering a particular subject
area
• Add a subject area to your favorites
• Add a course to your favorites
• Find the exact dates scheduled for a course
• Make a prebooking for a course
• Book a curriculum
• Book a course (classroom training, e-learning unit)
• Cancel a course booking
• Cancel a curriculum booking
• Submit a participation request
• Submit a booking cancellation request
• Appraise a course
• Electronically confirm participation (FDA signature)
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 55
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 64/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Lesson Overview
Of course, a major benefit of the new Learning Portal is that it greatly reduces the
administrative effort associated with course bookings and cancellations. This
section deals with the respective self-service scenarios in the Learning Portal.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Book courses in the SAP Learning Portal and cancel bookings
• Describe how booking or canceling a curriculum affects the individual
courses
• Explain how standard workflows support an approval process for bookings
and cancellations
• Differentiate between workflows on the basis of different course types
Business Example
Your company wants to reduce the administrative effort required for course
booking and cancellation, as well as improve transparency in further education
and training. For this reason, employees are to be given the opportunity to
book and cancel training courses in the intranet themselves. Workflows will be
implemented so that the managers' approval is automatically requested whenexpensive courses are involved, for example.
56 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 65/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Booking Courses
Figure 24: Booking a Course in the Learning Portal
One of the most important functions for the learner in the Learning Portal is
the ability to book (and cancel) courses independently. This frees up Training
Administration staff but they can still monitor participation bookings and training
activities.
Using self-service applications in their personalized Learning Portal, learners can
independently register or at least submit participation requests for all courses
with a variety of delivery methods. Whether to use of approval workflows in this
process is an important question. The following section explains how the standard
workflows in the SAP Learning Solution support the processes of booking and
canceling participation.
But first, there is a brief explanation of the independent booking (and cancellation)
procedure. The rules and regulations that apply (such as deadlines or staggered
fees) are stored in Training Management. These rules can also be applied when
you use workflow. The default setting in the standard SAP Learning Solutionallows courses to be booked up to the first day of the course: cancellation of a
WBT is allowed as long as it has not been launched in the Content Player.
Course Registration
The detail screen of a time-independent course (e.g. WBT) displays information
about the results of the prerequisites check that is performed (authorization,
existing qualifications and so on) and about whether the learner is allowed to
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 57
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 66/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
book the course. If the booking is authorized, a link is displayed that leads to the
booking screen after a confirmation prompt “Do you want to book this course?”.
This usually means that the course can also be started immediately.
The details screen of time-dependent courses first displays the dates scheduled.
The link “To registration” then takes the user to the details page of a specific
scheduled course. From this point on, the booking procedure is the same as for
time-independent courses. In addition to a prerequisites check, the system can
also check time availability.
A special note about curricula when booking time-dependent courses: A
curriculum is a group of individual courses that are combined as a package for
learners. This represents a Blended Learning offering in the system. Courses with
multiple delivery methods can be combined to form a curriculum.
Figure 25: Booking a Curriculum in the Learning Portal – Step 1
When you book a curriculum, you are simultaneously booking multiple courses.
The learner can branch to a date selection screen from the details page thatcontains information about the single course dates and the delivery methods
available. The date selection screen lists the possible dates scheduled for the
time-dependent courses (curriculum elements).
58 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 67/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Figure 26: Booking a Curriculum in the Learning Portal – Step 2
The learner can select and immediately book the most suitable date in each case.
When the curriculum is being created by the administrator, checks are performed
automatically to prevent errors in the sequence of the different elements.
Figure 27: Display of Booked Curriculum in the Learning Portal
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 59
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 68/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
When a participant has been booked for a curriculum, the curriculum and its
elements (courses) are displayed in the learner's Current Training Activities. The
curriculum elements are flagged accordingly. From this area, the learner can uselinks to access more information, and to launch WBT and online tests directly if
they have been released.
Canceling Course Bookings
From the personalized Learning Portal, learners can not only book courses, but
also cancel their own bookings. Since the date selection dialog is not required
in the case of e-learning courses, there is no real need to differentiate between
time-dependent and time-independent courses. Of course, there are also course
type-specific settings that can be configured in Customizing for Training
Management.
For example, in the standard system, bookings for classroom courses can be
canceled in the portal up until the first day of the course, while a WBT or online
test can only be canceled if it has not been started in the Content Player. A course
that has been launched once has, to all intents and purposes, been taken.
The “Cancel” area is on the details page of the booked course. In the standard
system, when the learner clicks the link “Cancel participation in this course”, a
brief confirmation prompt appears in an alert window. The system checks whether
the cancellation is allowed under the circumstances and notifies the learner of the
cancellation fees levied.
Figure 28: Canceling a Curriculum in the Learning Portal – Step 1
60 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 69/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Figure 29: Canceling a Curriculum in the Learning Portal – Step 2
Curricula can be canceled too from the Learning Portal in spite of the fact that
they are made up of multiple single courses. The training administrator can make
the following specification in the case of curricula:
• Cancellation only for the curriculum as a whole
• Cancellation of the individual curriculum elements
In both cases, the cancellation and deadline rules that apply to the individual
courses are valid. Before the cancellation is executed, the learner is informed of
the total cancellation fees involved. These derive from the sum of the cancellation
fees for the individual courses. When the learner clicks on the curriculum to be
canceled in the Current Training Activities, he accesses the details page of the
curriculum. Here you can see the individual curriculum elements (courses) that
make up the curriculum. Click “Participation” to view the booked dates.
Booking and Canceling with Workflows
SAP Business Workflow enables you to define business processes quickly and
simply. You can define simple procedures such as release or approval processes
or more complex ones. Workflows can be most efficiently implemented for
recurring work processes such as the “request – approve – book course” process.
The standard system contains a number of workflows that map predefined
business processes. These standard workflows are easy to implement. The
existing transactions and functions of the SAP System are used for this. The
organizational structure mapped in the Organizational Management component is
used to determine the employee's supervisor.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 61
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 70/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Figure 30: Workflows in the SAP Learning Solution
The SAP Learning Solution offers standard workflows for when the learner
requests a booking or a cancellation in the Learning Portal. In Customizing on the
back end, the training administrator can activate the workflows across the board
for each delivery method for the entire catalog, or for individual course types.
Figure 31: Workflow – Booking Course Participation
62 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 71/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Figure 32: Workflow – Canceling Course Participation
We distinguish the following four cases:
1. Booking participation in a time-dependent course
2. Booking participation in a time-independent course
3. Canceling participation in a time-dependent course
4. Canceling participation in a time-independent course
Figure 33: Learner View – Booking with Workflow Active
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 63
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 72/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
If an approval workflow has been defined for a course booking (e.g. classroom
training, curriculum), the link “submit participation request” is displayed under
“Book” on the details page of the course instead of the link “book this course”.
Figure 34: Overview: Booking a Time-Dependent Course
Figure 35: Booking a Time-Dependent Course – Step 1
64 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 73/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Figure 36: Booking a Time-Dependent Course – Step 2
Figure 37: Booking a Time-Dependent Course – Step 3
Case 1
In the case of a time-dependent course, a booking is created provisionally for the
course when a request is submitted. The workflow is triggered at the same time.
The learner's supervisor receives a workflow item containing the request data,
for example, the learner's name, the course requested, the course date, and the
participation fee. Information about the supervisor is determined by the workflow
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 65
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 74/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
from ERP2005 Organizational Management. The workflow item is routed to the
supervisor's workflow inbox or is sent by mail. The supervisor can decide to
approve or reject the request. If the supervisor rejects the request, the provisional booking is canceled. In R/3 Training Management, the training administrator can
define a deadline by which the supervisor must process the item. If the deadline
elapses without the participation having been approved or rejected, the course is
automatically considered approved and the booking is retained.
Figure 38: Booking a Time-Independent Course
The learner is notified of the outcome of the request by mail. In the Learning
Portal, the status of the workflow is indicated as follows:
• When participation has been requested: the course is displayed under Current
Training Activities with the status “participation requested”
• When the supervisor has approved participation (or approval deadline has
been exceeded): the status “participation requested” is deleted
• If the supervisor rejects participation: the course is no longer displayed
under Current Training Activities
66 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 75/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Figure 39: Booking a Time-Independent Course – Step 1
Figure 40: Booking a Time-Independent Course – Step 2
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 67
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 76/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Figure 41: Booking a Time-Independent Course – Step 3
Case 2
You can also implement approval workflows when time-independent courses
(such as WBT, online test) are booked. In this case, no provisional booking is
made in the background. The booking is made when the request is approved. This
is because no reservation of (possibly scarce) places is required. What is required
in this case is the release of the course, which usually signifies its immediate
launch. The learner is notified of the outcome of the workflow by mail and the
status of the course is displayed in the Learning Portal.
Figure 42: Canceling a Time-Dependent Course
68 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 77/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Case 3
You can also implement approval workflows when time-dependent courses are
canceled. The link “request cancellation” is displayed on the details page under
“Cancel” instead of the link “cancel this booking”.
When the workflow is triggered, the course remains booked in the back end until
the supervisor approves the cancellation. Only then does it disappear from the
Current Training Activities area. The status in the Learning Portal is as follows:
• When cancellation has been requested: the course is displayed under Current
Training Activities with the status “cancellation requested”
• If the supervisor rejects cancellation: the course is no longer displayed under
Current Training Activities
• If the supervisor rejects cancellation: the status “cancellation requested
”disappears
Figure 43: Canceling a Time-Independent Course
Case 4
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 69
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 78/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
In the standard SAP Learning Solution, the default deadline set for canceling a
time-independent course is until it has been launched in the Content Player.
The learner is notified by mail about whether the request has been “approved” or “rejected”. This information is also displayed in the Learning Portal as follows:
• When cancellation has been requested: the course is displayed under Current
Training Activities with the status “cancellation requested”
• If the supervisor approves cancellation: the course is no longer displayed
under Current Training Activities
• If the supervisor rejects cancellation: the status “cancellation requested”
disappears and the course remains visible under Current Training Activities
70 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 79/394
HR270 Lesson: Booking and Cancellation in the Learning Portal
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Book courses in the SAP Learning Portal and cancel bookings
• Describe how booking or canceling a curriculum affects the individual
courses
• Explain how standard workflows support an approval process for bookings
and cancellations
• Differentiate between workflows on the basis of different course types
Related Information
• Use a URL or cross-reference tag to point out additional information that
the participants may find useful, such as Web sites or white papers. Deletethis if not applicable.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 71
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 80/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Lesson: Complete Training
Lesson Overview
In this section, you will learn how to accompany a course in the Portal. During a
booked course, you can provide assistance in course-specific collaboration rooms.
At the conclusion of a course, learners can evaluate the course and confirm their
attendance in the Portal.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Name at least two important course follow-up activities for learners
• Describe how the Learning Portal makes these follow-up activities easier
Business Example
Even after a course is complete, the employees should continue to help training
administration by entering various information in the Learning Portal.
Course Appraisal in the Learning Portal
Online appraisals greatly facilitate the course evaluation process. Rating values
are collected and assigned automatically and the data collected is stored directly
for use in reporting. If an appraisal sheet is available online, for example, in theLearning Portal, the sheet was created in the back end component “Management
by Objectives”. Here, the Performance Management function provides the training
administrator with the following support functions:
• Create sample forms for example, for WBTs, trainers, classroom courses
and so on.
• Status management for appraisals (not released, released, archived)
72 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 81/394
HR270 Lesson: Complete Training
Figure 44: Course Appraisal in the Learning Portal
You can edit appraisal templates and display archived templates in the Learning
Portal. This is possible for all appraisals, whether course appraisals or trainer
appraisals. Since appraisals are always course-specific, they are displayed on the
course details page under “course appraisal”.
Depending on the training administrator's specifications, feedback can be given
in free-text form or on a scale. Appraisals need not be completed at one sitting,
you can store a temporary version, change it as required and complete it when
ready. The relevant links are displayed at the top of the online form and, like the
form itself, are intuitive and easy to use.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 73
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 82/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Participation Confirmation and FDA
Figure 45: Electronic Confirmation of Participation / Signature (FDA)
There are two ways of confirming participation in the Learning Portal:
• Simple electronic confirmation of participation
• Electronic signature according to FDA guidelines (Food and DrugAdministration)
In the standard SAP Learning Solution, electronic confirmation of participation
is not active. The training administrator decides whether and for which courses
electronic confirmation of participation is required. First, in Customizing on
the back end, the administrator can define generally whether simple electronic
confirmation or confirmation according to the FDA requirements is to be used.
These settings then apply to the entire course catalog, but can also be made at
individual course level.
Simple electronic confirmation of participation:
If simple electronic confirmation of participation is active, the link “set courseto completed/confirm participation” is displayed for time-independent courses
(WBTs, online tests) on the course details page. Clicking this link sets the course
to completed and triggers automatic follow-up processing for the course. This
action also confirms participation.
In the case of time-dependent courses (classroom training, curriculum), the link
“confirm participation” is displayed in the detailed information. Clicking this
link confirms participation in the course. In Training Management, attainable
qualifications may then be transferred to the learner and the table entry
“confirmed” is created.
74 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 83/394
HR270 Lesson: Complete Training
This information can be evaluated in the standard reports “Bookings per
Participant” and “Bookings per Course” in ERP2005 Training Management.
Electronic Signature According to FDA Requirements
Compliance with FDA requirements is an important aspect when software is
implemented in the USA. The FDA requires that course participation is explicitly
confirmed by entering a user ID and a password in the Learning Portal. The
procedure from that point is the same as for simple confirmation.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 75
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 84/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Name at least two important course follow-up activities for learners
• Describe how the Learning Portal makes these follow-up activities easier
76 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 85/394
HR270 Lesson: Learner Account
Lesson: Learner Account
Lesson Overview
You will learn about the structure and functions of the Learner Account.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Display and delete learner-specific prebookings
• Display and delete learner favorites
• Display learner's qualification profile
• Run personal profile matchup• Save learner-specific settings, for example, for a learning strategy or search
options
Business Example
You are a learner and have just logged onto your personalized Learning Portal.
You are interested in the entire lower left screen area, the Learner Account.
As a learner, you want to know what processes are supported by the Learner
Account and what information it displays for you.
You want to display your qualification profile and then run a profile matchup
with the position you currently hold.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 77
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 86/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Learner Account
Figure 46: Personalized Learner Account
The learner account contains the following learner-specific data:
• Training activities
• Course prebookings• Favorites
• Qualifications profile
• Profile matchup
• My Settings
Training Activities
Under the link “Training Activities”, you can find information about your current
and completed training courses. Learners can view their complete training
history, that is, all of the classroom courses, WBTs, or virtual classroom sessions
they have participated in. Prerequisites for moving a course to the “Completed
Courses” area:
• The learner has set a WBT course to 'completed' on the course details screen
on completion.
• The training administrator has finished follow-up processing of a classroom
training course.
78 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 87/394
HR270 Lesson: Learner Account
Prebookings
Prebookings are used in Training Management to register demand for further
courses of a course type. Prebooking data is taken into consideration in the
planning phase. Enabling learners to register interest in courses by making
prebookings for them in the Portal means that training administrators can plan
future courses more effectively and demand-oriented.
As a rule, learners make prebookings for courses when they cannot find a suitable
course scheduled in the Date Selection dialog. They are offered the option of
making a prebooking at the date selection stage.
Attributes that the learner can store as preferences include:
• Prebooking start and end dates
• Language• Location
Based on these preferences, the training administrator can schedule new courses
in the R/3 Back End to satisfy demand and then book learners on the prebooking
list for the new courses. Learners can delete their prebookings for course types
until the training administrator converts the prebookings into bookings. When a
prebooking is converted into a booking, the booked course and not the prebooking
is listed under Training Activities. The training administrator usually notifies the
learner of this - for example, by e-mail.
Hint: The “Add to Favorites” function is also available under DateSelection. Unlike prebookings, which are then registered in the back end,
learners use the favorites list to bookmark courses “for their own interest”.
Favorites
This function enables learners to compile a list of courses and subject areas that
interest them. Since the course catalog can be somewhat large and complex,
learners can use the favorites to have quick access to specific courses and topics
that particularly interest them.
The training administrator cannot see the learner's favorites on the personalized
Learning Portal. They are only visible to the learner. In practise, this is a “favoritesfunction” for the course offering in the catalog. Entries added to the favorites
can be just as easily deleted.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 79
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 88/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Qualifications Profile
Figure 47: Learner Account: Qualifications Profile
Learners can click the relevant link to access their personal qualifications profile,
which is stored in the back end.
Hint: A complete qualifications catalog containing all qualifications
categorized into groups is stored in ERP2005. Each qualification has
a scale appended, which defines the various proficiencies possible for
the qualification. The learner's profile contains details of his or her
qualifications including proficiency. For more information, see the
“Personnel Development” unit.
80 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 89/394
HR270 Lesson: Learner Account
Figure 48: Attaining Qualifications
If learners identify deficits in the qualifications required for their jobs, they can
click the relevant link to check whether there are courses available that would
close these gaps, and the book the course immediately, where appropriate.
On successful completion of the course, the qualifications profile is adjusted
accordingly and this is then visible in the Learning Portal. One major advantage
of this transparency is that it enables learners to be “proactive” in ensuring that
their personnel development data is kept up-to-date.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 81
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 90/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Profile matchup
Figure 49: Profile matchup
The system uses the following user-specific data for a profile matchup:
• Which position does the user hold? (Organizational Management)• Which qualifications does the person have? (Personnel Development)
• Which requirements are related with the position/describing job? (Personnel
Development)
In the Profile Matchup, the proficiencies of the job requirements are matched
against the person's qualification proficiencies and the result is displayed.
Required qualifications that the person does not have are flagged with a red
warning triangle. By placing the cursor over the icon, the user will find
explanations of the information displayed.
82 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 91/394
HR270 Lesson: Learner Account
My Settings
Figure 50: Personal Settings (Learning Strategy and Search Options)
Under “My Settings”, the learner can configure settings pertaining to the preferred
learning strategy, catalog view, search options in his or her Learning Portal. The
learning strategies available are defined in Customizing for Training Management.
As explained in detail in the Authoring Environment unit, learning strategies areused by the Content Player to determine the sequence in which WBT content is
presented to the individual learner. Catalog views were introduced in the previous
lesson, “Navigation”.
If the learner specifies preferred search options in this area of the Learning Portal,
they are used in the search for courses. For example, if the preferred language is
“German”, the hit list contains any courses in German at the top. The same applies
to city and time period.
Moreover, you can delete the cookie for the Learning Portal in this area of the
Learner Account. You do so to shorten response times. so the information does
not have to be retrieved from the back end each time. As a result, however,changes may not be visible immediately in the Learning Portal in rare cases. In
such cases, you may want to use the features described here.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 83
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 92/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Display and delete learner-specific prebookings
• Display and delete learner favorites
• Display learner's qualification profile
• Run personal profile matchup
• Save learner-specific settings, for example, for a learning strategy or search
options
84 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 93/394
HR270 Lesson: Online Content Player
Lesson: Online Content Player
Lesson Overview
Participants learn how to use the Content Player, play courses with the player
and navigate through courses.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Start a booked Web Based Training (WBT) online
• Navigate to the Content Player
• Display a table of contents or defined learning path for a WBT
• Complete processing of a WBT and check your learning progress in the protal
• Start a booked online test
Business Example
You are a learner. You have logged on to your personalized Learning Portal and
booked a WBT from there. You now want to begin processing it.
Launching the Content Player
The Content Player is the tool for playing content in the SAP Learning Solution.
You launch and work through all time-independent courses, such as WBTs and
online tests, from the Learning Portal using this player.
Figure 51: Launching the Online Content Player
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 85
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 94/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Before you can play the Web-based content for a course, you must make a booking
for the course. This booking triggers release of the content and a link is displayed
with which you can start the course. You can start the Content Player and thecourse content from the details page of the course. As a rule, however, you start it
on the Training Homepage under Current Training Activities.
When you click the link “Start Now”, a window appears in which the Online
Content Player and the WBT content is launched. The Content Player opens
the WBT at the point at which it was last interrupted, based on the data stored
in the LMS.
Navigation / Learning Path / Table of Contents in theContent Player
The Content Player has functions that enable the learner to navigate through thecontent, as well as other functions that serve as orientation aids for the learner.
Figure 52: Content Player - Navigation
As in most WBT offerings, the learner can use the functions “next step” and“previous step” to navigate in linear fashion through the content. To proceed
step-by-step through a course, the learner simply chooses “next step” every time.
86 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 95/394
HR270 Lesson: Online Content Player
Figure 53: Content Player - Table of Contents
The table of contents provides the learner with an orientation guide, pinpointing
where he or she currently is in the course. The table of contents lists the course
content. The learner can easily see which content has already been completed,
how much is still to come, and the current position.
In most cases, the learner can click the respective unit to go directly to the
corresponding learning object.
Hint: This does not invalidate the rules for the processing sequence,
however. The Content Player retains the prerequisites and “next object to
process” in accordance with the author's definition.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 87
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 96/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Figure 54: Content Player - Learning Path
The learning path gives the learner a preview of the content still to be completed
in the correct sequence. The learning path is set up on the basis of the learner's
learning strategy and the learning objectives achieved to date.
Example: If a placement test showed that the learner already had certain learning
objectives prior to taking the course, the relevant units are skipped in the course.
Figure 55: Content Player - Help
88 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 97/394
HR270 Lesson: Online Content Player
The learner can call the Content Player help function, which explains the functions
described in the lesson in detail.
Closing the Content Player
Figure 56: Closing the Content Player
When the learner finishes working on content, completes an online test, or interrupts a course to resume it later, it is important that he or she logs off
and closes the Content Player properly, and does not just exit the player. The
Content Player must be closed down properly for it to save and write all of the
necessary data about progress to the Learning Management System. Progress data
is displayed in the learner's current training activities. This area displays details
about the number of times the content was accessed, the completion time, and the
progress (what % of the content was completed). The details page of the course
contains more information, such as the date of first access, date of last access and
so on. After logoff when content has not been completed 100%, if the learner
restarts the Content Player using the link “Start Now”, the Content Player opens
the course at the point at which it was interrupted.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 89
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 98/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Playing Online Tests
Figure 57: Online Test in the Learning Portal
One feature to note with online tests: The navigation functions are not relevant
for test objects. The only function offered by the player for online tests is the
log off function. The test-specific functions that are important, such as display
introduction, start test, end test, form part of the test object itself.
An online test is a stand-alone test created in the SAP Authoring Environment
that learners can take online. Once the learner has registered for the test, it can
be launched directly and played from the Learning Portal. When the learner has
completed the test, he or she is given feedback on the results.
90 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 99/394
HR270 Lesson: Online Content Player
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Start a booked Web Based Training (WBT) online
• Navigate to the Content Player
• Display a table of contents or defined learning path for a WBT
• Complete processing of a WBT and check your learning progress in the protal
• Start a booked online test
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 91
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 100/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
Lesson: Offline Content Player
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, you learn how to use the functions of the Offline Content Player.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Define the cycle that the Offline Player enables, and how it makes it possible
to download content for offline learning, yet still notify the central LMS of
the learning progress.
Business Example
You are a field sales employee at a company, and want to process a WBT you have
booked during your business trips. At the same time, you want to ensure that the
time you spend studying the material is registered by Training Management.
Offline Content Player
Figure 58: Learning Offline
The SAP Learning Solution offers opportunities for playing courses offline to
learners that want or need to do so outside of office hours.
Learners can download course content and work through it offline if they have
the offline version of the Content Player, the Offline Player, installed on their
local client.
92 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 101/394
HR270 Lesson: Offline Content Player
Content can be downloaded from the details page of a course by means of a link.
This option to play the course offline is described on this page. The functions and
navigation options in the Offline Content Player are the same as in the OnlineContent Player. However, the Online Player communicates directly with the back
end and stores progress data directly. To ensure a smooth transition to online
playing, the learner must synchronize the progress made offline with the data in
the back end the next time he or she logs on to the Learning Portal.
In the Learning Portal, the course is displayed as being played offline until the
synchronization has been completed successfully.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 93
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 102/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
94 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 103/394
HR270 Lesson: Offline Content Player
Exercise 3: The SAP Learning Solution for
End UsersExercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Find specific course offerings in the SAP Learning Portal
• Book and prebook business events in the SAP Learning Portal
• Describe the features of the SAP Content Player
Business Example
As an employee in an innovative company, you want to familiarize yourself withthe new Learning Portal. You start by maintaining your training activities in the
Learning Portal and launching a Web Based Training (WBT).
Hint: In this exercise, you will be working in the Learning Portal of the
IDES Training System. The design of the portal is usually the Corporate
Design, but it can be personalized.
Task 1:
Familiarize yourself with the options available in the SAP Learning Portal.
1. Log on again with your user name to the IDES Learning Portal. Use the
personalize function in the top level navigation area and synchronize the
language of the Learning Portal with the language set for your browser or
select “English”.
2. Can you book yourself for a WBT to improve your business English? Note:
the course need not necessarily be called “Business English”.
If no booking is possible, when is the next scheduled date?
3. “Blended Solutions” are referred to as curricula in the SAP Learning
Solution. How many curricula are currently on offer in the Learning Portal?
4. You have rudimentary knowledge of SAP HR and want to gain an overviewof the SAP Learning Solution.
Book the English-language WBT “SAP Learning Solution”, which is listed
as a “mandatory” course.
5. Compare your mandatory courses and the catalog list to the left of Maria
Jordan with your own (demonstration by your instructor). What differences
do you notice and why?
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 95
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 104/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
6. Start the WBT you have just booked from your Learning Portal. Start the test
and answer a few questions before navigating through the first steps.
Compare the data displayed in the “Table of Contents” and in the “Path”.
What differences are there in the two displays?
Log off again and examine your learning progress.
7. Book the WBT “Outlook Express”.
8. Book yourself on your mandatory curriculum “Electronics Blended
Learning” for whatever dates suit you.
9. Check your booking under Training Activities. Can you start the WBT
immediately? Why (not)?
10. After careful consideration, you have decided to apply for a transfer to
Lisbon. Your boss does not return from vacation for another two weeks,
however. Add the course “Portuguese for Beginners” to your favorites.
Imagine it is 2 weeks later and your boss has convinced you that some
project in the back of beyond is far more important. Check whether your
favorites are still up to date.
Task 2:
To support the continuous feedback process on your company's course offering,
you want to give feedback about the Outlook Express WBT and rate it.
1. Start the appraisal for the Outlook Express WBT.2. Make your entries and save temporarily.
3. Open the appraisal again, make some more entries, and finish.
96 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 105/394
HR270 Lesson: Offline Content Player
Solution 3: The SAP Learning Solution for
End UsersTask 1:
Familiarize yourself with the options available in the SAP Learning Portal.
1. Log on again with your user name to the IDES Learning Portal. Use the
personalize function in the top level navigation area and synchronize the
language of the Learning Portal with the language set for your browser or
select “English”.
a) Launching the Learning Portal
In the upper right screen, click on Personalize. In the “Detailed
Navigation” view, select the “User Profile” menu item and click on
“Change”. Now choose English as the language and click on “Save”.
2. Can you book yourself for a WBT to improve your business English? Note:
the course need not necessarily be called “Business English”.
If no booking is possible, when is the next scheduled date?
a) Use the search function (upper left) to search for “Bus” or “Engl*” or
“English”. You find “Business English”. Click the link to discover that
this is only available as a classroom course and the next scheduled
course is _______.
The alternative solution would have been to search for special WBTs.Opening the language group is a reasonable approach too, however,
this does not guarantee you a complete overview of the entire catalog.
3. “Blended Solutions” are referred to as curricula in the SAP Learning
Solution. How many curricula are currently on offer in the Learning Portal?
a) Choose Extended Search. Select the delivery method “Curriculum” and
start the search. 20 hits are displayed (in the upper right window).
4. You have rudimentary knowledge of SAP HR and want to gain an overview
of the SAP Learning Solution.
Book the English-language WBT “SAP Learning Solution”, which is listedas a “mandatory” course.
a) Enter “Learning Sol”, for example, in the search box after restricting
the search to WBT. Click the link to display the detail page for the
“SAP Learning Solution”. You are pleased to discover that your
knowledge of SAP HR is sufficient to fulfill the prerequisites for
attending the course, and book yourself on the course. You confirm
your intention to book the course in the additional dialog box.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 97
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 106/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
5. Compare your mandatory courses and the catalog list to the left of Maria
Jordan with your own (demonstration by your instructor). What differences
do you notice and why?
a) The catalog in the left bar is basically the same for all employees. You
function within the company means that you have to attend different
mandatory courses (Training Home - top middle) and and require
different qualifications than Maria Jordan. The right frame is the same
for all employees (default), while the frame in the center is always
personalized.
6. Start the WBT you have just booked from your Learning Portal. Start the test
and answer a few questions before navigating through the first steps.
Compare the data displayed in the “Table of Contents” and in the “Path”.
What differences are there in the two displays?
Log off again and examine your learning progress.
a) Click the “Start Course Now” link in the detail view of the WBT
“Learning Solution” or from within the training activities. The Content
Player launches and begins the course with a test. You can take the test
or complete it directly. You then click “Continue” several times, until
you reach the links to the index and the path.
In the table of contents, you can view a general overview of the course
content. In the dialog box Table of Contents, the topics are displayed in
the sequence in which the author created them. This display sequence
is not affected by the learning strategy you selected. In the Table of Contents, entries that are highlighted in color take you directly to the
relevant topic when you click them. The entries displayed in this way
depend on the learner's completion status and on the selected learning
strategy (see the Authoring Environment unit).
The learning path provides you with a means of orientation within a
course. The dialog box Learning Path presents an overview of the
course depending on the learning strategy selected. In the header, you
see the content of the topic currently open. In the lower part, the system
displays the other topics in the context of the learning path (as elements
on a dark background). As in the upper part, elements that have already
been completed or displayed are indicated. The current learning objectis indicated by a green checkmark or an open tab.
Hint: The existence of certain test sections can mean that you
no longer have to process the corresponding content.
Click Log Off and close the window. Refresh your training activities.
You can now see the completion time of the course.
Continued on next page
98 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 107/394
HR270 Lesson: Offline Content Player
7. Book the WBT “Outlook Express”.
a) Proceed in the same manner as described in point 4.
8. Book yourself on your mandatory curriculum “Electronics Blended
Learning” for whatever dates suit you.
a) Follow the link from your mandatory course to the detailed view and
select a curriculum. Change the number of days for the preview, if
necessary. Choose “To Date Selection” and choose your dates by
selecting the corresponding rows. Once you have selected all the
necessary components (lecture, workshop and WBT) you can book
your attendance.
9. Check your booking under Training Activities. Can you start the WBT
immediately? Why (not)?
a) Go to your Learner Account - Training Activities. You will see your
new courses and your assignment to the curriculum. You cannot start
the WBT right now because the curriculum has not started yet.
10. After careful consideration, you have decided to apply for a transfer to
Lisbon. Your boss does not return from vacation for another two weeks,
however. Add the course “Portuguese for Beginners” to your favorites.
Imagine it is 2 weeks later and your boss has convinced you that some
project in the back of beyond is far more important. Check whether your
favorites are still up to date.
a) Enter “Port”, for example, as a term in the search.
Select Portuguese for Beginners and go to the detail view. Choose
Add Course to Favorites.
You can check this favorites list under Learner Account / Favorites and
either delete the entry or save it for another occasion, as you wish.
Task 2:
To support the continuous feedback process on your company's course offering,
you want to give feedback about the Outlook Express WBT and rate it.
1. Start the appraisal for the Outlook Express WBT.
a) Appraising a course
Under Training Activities, click the course name to access the detail
view for the WBT. Click the link “Call course appraisal” (bottom) to
appraise the course.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 99
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 108/394
Unit 3: SAP Learning Portal HR270
2. Make your entries and save temporarily.
a) Answer some of the questions and click Save / Exit. Close the window.
Hint: You have now saved the data temporarily. You submit it
(irrevocably) for appraisal in the next step.
3. Open the appraisal again, make some more entries, and finish.
a) As in step 1, open the appraisal again, make some more entries and
choose Complete.
100 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 109/394
HR270 Lesson: Offline Content Player
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Define the cycle that the Offline Player enables, and how it makes it possible
to download content for offline learning, yet still notify the central LMS of
the learning progress.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 101
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 110/394
Unit Summary HR270
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Explain and execute the business process of the Learning Portal
• Describe data exchange with back end components
• Execute a simple search
• Execute an extended search
• Navigate through the course catalog overview
• Find more detailed information and find courses covering a particular subject
area
• Add a subject area to your favorites
• Add a course to your favorites
• Find the exact dates scheduled for a course
• Make a prebooking for a course
• Book a curriculum
• Book a course (classroom training, e-learning unit)
• Cancel a course booking
• Cancel a curriculum booking
• Submit a participation request
• Submit a booking cancellation request
• Appraise a course
• Electronically confirm participation (FDA signature)• Book courses in the SAP Learning Portal and cancel bookings
• Describe how booking or canceling a curriculum affects the individual
courses
• Explain how standard workflows support an approval process for bookings
and cancellations
• Differentiate between workflows on the basis of different course types
• Name at least two important course follow-up activities for learners
• Describe how the Learning Portal makes these follow-up activities easier
• Display and delete learner-specific prebookings
• Display and delete learner favorites
• Display learner's qualification profile
• Run personal profile matchup
• Save learner-specific settings, for example, for a learning strategy or search
options
• Start a booked Web Based Training (WBT) online
• Navigate to the Content Player
• Display a table of contents or defined learning path for a WBT
102 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 111/394
HR270 Unit Summary
• Complete processing of a WBT and check your learning progress in the protal
• Start a booked online test
• Define the cycle that the Offline Player enables, and how it makes it possible
to download content for offline learning, yet still notify the central LMS of
the learning progress.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 103
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 112/394
Unit Summary HR270
104 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 113/394
Unit 4 Organizational Management
Unit Overview
This unit briefly outlines the purpose of SAP Organizational Management, its
intersection points with the SAP Learning Solution, and the data you have to
maintain in OM to be able to use all the functions in the SAP Learning Solution.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Name the business activities involved in Organizational Management
• List intersections with other SAP modules
• Explain the Organizational Management data model
• Create organizational units
• Create jobs• Create positions for the individual organizational units
• Specify the chief position
• Store positions with jobs
• Staff positions with persons
• Configure and implement standard workflows
Unit Contents
Lesson: Organizational Management General Information . . .. . . .. . . . . .. .106
Lesson: Enterprise Structure in Organizational Management ............ 114
Lesson: Organizational Management and Workflow .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 118Exercise 4: Jobs, Positions, Persons, Relationships ..................121
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 105
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 114/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Lesson: Organizational Management General
Information
Lesson Overview
Participants receive an overview of Organizational Management with particular
reference to the SAP Learning Solution.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Name the business activities involved in Organizational Management
• List intersections with other SAP modules• Explain the Organizational Management data model
Business Example
You are responsible for your enterprise's organizational plan and you want to find
out what options are offered by SAP Organizational Management to enable you
to map this structure.
Background
Figure 59: Organizational Structure
106 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 115/394
HR270 Lesson: Organizational Management General Information
Enterprises need to be able to map their organizational plans, that is, the
task-specific functional structure of the company, to assist the various business
and human resource processes. An often important aspect is the representation of a hierarchy, or the assignment of organizational units to superior units.
Data Model
Figure 60: Data Model (1)
SAP HR Organizational Management is founded on object-oriented design. This
means that Organizational Management is based on the concept that each element
in an organization is represented as an independent object with its own attributes
and properties. These objects are created and maintained individually with the
corresponding records (called “infotypes”). They are then related with one another
by means of relationships (see graphic) to form a flexible network that can be used
for personnel planning, forecasts and reporting.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 107
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 116/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Objects
Figure 61: Objects
You can create an organizational plan using multiple different object types. The
following five object types typically form the basis of the organizational plan:
Organizational units O
Jobs C
Positions S
Cost centers K
Persons P
Persons are the holders of positions. Positions are defined by jobs and are assigned
to organizational units and cost centers.
108 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 117/394
HR270 Lesson: Organizational Management General Information
Organizational Unit
Figure 62: Organizational Unit
Organizational units represent the functional units of the enterprise. Depending on
how tasks are structured within the enterprise, an organizational unit could be a
department, a group, or a project team, for example.
An example of an organizational unit might be the Controlling Department, which
incorporates employees directly along with other organizational structures, such
as the Accounts Department.
You create an organizational structure by assigning organizational units to one
another. The uppermost organizational unit in the organizational structure is the
root organizational unit.
Caution: The organizational units do not always correspond to other
enterprise units such as personnel areas, company codes, or business
areas. These are used to map structures such as Personnel Administration
or Accounting in the relevant components.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 109
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 118/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Positions
Figure 63: Positions
A position represents a vacancy that is to be occupied by a person (employee).
Positions are used to map the existing or required headcount in an organizational
unit. Positions are created in an organizational unit depending on its existing
headcount and future personnel demand. These form the basis of the staff
assignment plan. When you have created positions, you can complete your staff
assignments plan by assigning persons to them.
Jobs
Figure 64: Jobs
110 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 119/394
HR270 Lesson: Organizational Management General Information
Jobs are used as a tool for creating positions. Positions are the individual,
specific posts in the enterprise held by persons (such as Secretary of Purchasing
Department), while jobs are general classifications of the functions that have to be performed in the enterprise (such as secretary). Jobs are defined in detail by
attributes. By assigning attributes to jobs you create job descriptions that can be
valid for multiple positions with comparable tasks and characteristics.
The jobs you create together form the job index, that is, the list of jobs performed
in the enterprise.
When you create a new position (such as Secretary of the Sales Department), you
can relate it with an existing job (Secretary). The position automatically inherits
the tasks and attributes associated with the job.
If no such job already exists, it is created automatically and the tasks and attributes
are assigned to it. This job is then available for other new positions.
The possibility to relate similar or identical positions to jobs greatly facilitates
personnel work since it means that you do not have to assign the same tasks and
attributes to each individual position. In addition, where necessary you have the
possibility of assigning specific tasks and attributes directly to a position.
Cost Center
Figure 65: Cost Center
The costs incurred by an organizational unit are generally posted to the cost center
(master cost center) that is assigned directly to the organizational unit itself or
indirectly inherited from a higher-level unit.
Cost distribution is passed on to lower-level positions and organizational units
if they have been assigned no specific cost distribution or master cost center
themselves.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 111
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 120/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Person
Figure 66: Person
Object type Person corresponds to a natural person who is managed as an
employee in Personnel Administration.
The assignment of a person (employee) to a position maps the following
information:
• Where the employee is (functionally) assigned in the enterprise
• What tasks the employee has
112 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 121/394
HR270 Lesson: Organizational Management General Information
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Name the business activities involved in Organizational Management
• List intersections with other SAP modules
• Explain the Organizational Management data model
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 113
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 122/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Lesson: Enterprise Structure in Organizational
Management
Lesson Overview
Participants learn how to define an organizational structure and map it in
the system. Participants learn about the basic object types in Organizational
Management.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create organizational units• Create jobs
• Create positions for the individual organizational units
• Specify the chief position
• Store positions with jobs
• Staff positions with persons
Business Example
In your HR department, the demands for evaluations that reflect the hierarchical
structure of the company are increasing. Likewise, IT requires the capability
to determine the relevant manager so that workflows can be mapped for each
employee.
You should map the organizational structure of your company in your HR system
accordingly. To do this, you must set up a hierarchy of departments and areas
and assign positions to them.
User Interface in Organizational Management
Organizational Management contains multiple interfaces where you can create
and edit your organizational plans.
• Organization and Staffing• General Structures
• Matrix
• View Infotype Maintenance
• Simple Maintenance
• Structural Graphics
114 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 123/394
HR270 Lesson: Enterprise Structure in Organizational Management
The following section only deals with the Organization and Staffing view. This
provides a user interface for creating and editing organizational plans. On this
interface, you can set up the organizational structure in easy steps.
The understanding needed for this course is developed mainly in the exercise for
this lesson. An overview of SAP HR Organizational Management is available in
the separate SAP course of the same name.
Organization and Staffing
The user interface of the Organization and Staffing view is used for creating,
displaying, and editing organizational plans.
Transaction PPOME is composed of a number of screen frames, each incorporating
specific functions:
Figure 67: Organization and Staffing
You can use the search functions in the left screen Search Area to search for
specific organizational objects. The search results are displayed in the selection
area.
These organizational objects can be transferred from here to the center screen area,
the overview area. There they are displayed in their organizational context.
In the lower screen area, the detail area, information is displayed about the
different objects (tab pages usually correspond to the relevant infotypes). The
information can be edited here.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 115
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 124/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Validity Concept
Organizational plans in companies are subject to frequent change. For this reason,
Organizational Management enables keydate- and time period-specific editing of
the organizational structure, the staff assignments plan and the various objects.
This is why you specify a validity period when you create or assign objects and
their attributes. You steer the display of objects by specifying a keydate and a
preview period. Data changes are represented by means of time periods.
116 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 125/394
HR270 Lesson: Enterprise Structure in Organizational Management
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Create organizational units
• Create jobs
• Create positions for the individual organizational units
• Specify the chief position
• Store positions with jobs
• Staff positions with persons
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 117
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 126/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Lesson: Organizational Management and Workflow
Lesson Overview
Participants receive an overview of the standard workflows in the SAP Learning
Solution
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Configure and implement standard workflows
Business Example
In your company, you need the approval of your manager and the training
department before you can attend a course. You want to represent the
corresponding process in the system across the whole of the company.
Integration
Organizational Management forms the basis for using other HR components and
functions, for Authorization Management, and for SAP Business Workflow.
The SAP Learning Solution requires the Organizational Management component
to map the following:
• Position staffing – integration between Personnel Administration and
Organizational Management
• Assignment of supervisors (for example, for Workflow)
• Identification of requirements profiles (in connection with the profile
matchup function of Personnel Development)
• Responsibilities within Training Management
• Access authorizations for training administrators, coordinators, learners,
their mentors and supervisors
Organizational Management is also the basis for SAP Business Workflow. The
current organizational plan stored in the system serves as the basis of the routingstructure along which SAP Business Workflow routes tasks to the relevant persons.
118 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 127/394
HR270 Lesson: Organizational Management and Workflow
The Relevance of Organizational Management for Workflows in the SAP Learning Solution
Figure 68: The Relevance of Organizational Management for the Workflow
The integration of Organizational Management in SAP Business Workflow enables
you to link tasks with agents within the organization. This relationship enables the
system to determine the “right” supervisor. The Workflow Management System
enables active release of an employee's booking.
The release process and the persons involved in it are made as transparent as
possible. Changes in the organizational structure (new supervisor) can be taken
into account in the workflow thanks to the Organizational Management design.
SAP Business Workflow separates the organizational aspects of the control logic
from the application logic.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 119
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 128/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
120 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 129/394
HR270 Lesson: Organizational Management and Workflow
Exercise 4: Jobs, Positions, Persons,
RelationshipsExercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Check the connections (relationships) between the different objects in SAP
HR using a standard transaction
• Check the position held by an employee within the company hierarchy
Business Example
As a personnel planning specialist, you are interested in exactly how muchinformation you can find out from the employee data in Personnel Administration
with regard to their actual activities, or how to determine their superiors.
Task 1:
Once again, you use the Easy Access menu on the back end. You want to find out
your own position and job as an example. To do this, you first use a standard
transaction from SAP HR PA (Personnel Administration).
1. You should know your user name from exercise 2. Using transaction PA20,
you can find out the organizational assignment of your position, job, and
organizational unit.
Position
Job
Organizational unit
Task 2:
You now want to display your position in the organizational structure hierarchy
of your company. You remember transaction PPOME from previous HR basics
courses.
1. Find your Person in the overall structure.
2. Check the data you have found out. Do you hold the same postion?
3. Who will most likely approve your workflow requests for course
participation submitted in the Learning Portal?
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 121
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 130/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Solution 4: Jobs, Positions, Persons,
RelationshipsTask 1:
Once again, you use the Easy Access menu on the back end. You want to find out
your own position and job as an example. To do this, you first use a standard
transaction from SAP HR PA (Personnel Administration).
1. You should know your user name from exercise 2. Using transaction PA20,
you can find out the organizational assignment of your position, job, and
organizational unit.
PositionJob
Organizational unit
a) Organizational Assignment 0001
Transaction PA 20
Enter your personnel number from exercise 2 “Technical Essentials”
and confirm by pressing Enter.
Choose the infotype Organizational Assignment and then Display,
or select the overview directly.
Task 2:
You now want to display your position in the organizational structure hierarchy
of your company. You remember transaction PPOME from previous HR basics
courses.
1. Find your Person in the overall structure.
a) Organizational structure
Transaction PPOME
Choose Person (top left), enter your Person in the search field, confirmand then double-click the Person that then appears (bottom left). The
system takes you back to the right of the organizational structure. If
necessary, click the Goto icon in the upper left corner of the main frame
to get to the Organizational Assignment view.
Continued on next page
122 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 131/394
HR270 Lesson: Organizational Management and Workflow
2. Check the data you have found out. Do you hold the same postion?
a) In fact, the data matches the data from exercise 1 “Organizational
Management”.
Hint: This is a result of the active integration between SAP
HR Personnel Administration and SAP HR Organizational
Management.
3. Who will most likely approve your workflow requests for course
participation submitted in the Learning Portal?
a) Double-click on your organizational unit, Network and
Telecommunications - Int , and set Staff Assignments Plan (Structure)
as the view. You can recognize your department head, Mr. WilliamChristiansen, because he is “wearing the hat”, or because the “Head of
own organizational unit” indicator is set in the infotype for his position.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 123
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 132/394
Unit 4: Organizational Management HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Configure and implement standard workflows
124 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 133/394
HR270 Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Name the business activities involved in Organizational Management
• List intersections with other SAP modules
• Explain the Organizational Management data model
• Create organizational units
• Create jobs
• Create positions for the individual organizational units
• Specify the chief position
• Store positions with jobs
• Staff positions with persons
• Configure and implement standard workflows
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 125
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 134/394
Unit Summary HR270
126 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 135/394
Unit 5 Personnel Development
Unit Overview
You will learn about the basic features of the SAP HR Personnel Development
component and its relevance for the SAP Learning Solution.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Define the business process of Personnel Development
• Describe the integration with other SAP modules through the corresponding
interfaces
• Explain the Personnel Development data model based on object type
"Qualifications"
• Create scales with corresponding proficiencies
• Create qualification groups
• Create qualifications
• Maintain additional data for qualifications
• Display the qualifications profile (requirements profile) for persons (jobs)
• Create qualifications (requirements) for persons (jobs)
• Assign proficiencies to qualifications (requirements)
Unit Contents
Lesson: SAP Personnel Development ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .128
Lesson: Creating Scales/Qualifications Catalog............................132Lesson: Assigning Qualifications to a Person... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..136
Exercise 5: SAP Personnel Development: Interaction with the LearningPortal......................................................................... 139
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 127
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 136/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
Lesson: SAP Personnel Development
Lesson Overview
This section will provide you with an overview of SAP Personnel Development,
particularly with regard to its use within the SAP Learning Solution.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Define the business process of Personnel Development
• Describe the integration with other SAP modules through the corresponding
interfaces
• Explain the Personnel Development data model based on object type
"Qualifications"
Business Example
You work in the Personnel Development department at your company and want
to focus your further education and training measures on your company's future
requirements. Accordingly, you plan to collect and maintain the corresponding
data regarding employee qualification profiles at your company.
SAP HR Personnel Development
Figure 69: Components of Personnel Development
128 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 137/394
HR270 Lesson: SAP Personnel Development
The Personnel Development component enables you to identify, promote, and
make the best use of your employees' potential. The application also has functions
to support the planning of specific development measures.
The components of Personnel Development are:
• Skills Management (qualifications profiles and competency profiles,
employee profiles and requirements profiles)
• Individual Development (drawing up and using development plans)
• Career and Succession Planning (finding profiles and qualifications)
• Appraisal Systems or Management by Objectives (MbO)
They are called qualifications when they are assigned to employees or applicants.
As such they define the skills, know-how, knowledge and abilities of persons.
They are called requirements when they are assigned to jobs and positions.Aptitude or suitability for a job is determined by comparing qualifications with
requirements.
Accordingly, it is essential to the SAP data model that it be possible to link the
same objects (such as Q = Business Spanish) to both people as qualifications
and to jobs as requirements.
Figure 70: Profile Matchup Data Model
Among other things, this enables the simple, direct comparison of qualifications
profiles and requirements profiles. This can help screen suitable candidates for
staffing a new job, or ensure that qualification deficits lead to direct prebooking
of the corresponding courses.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 129
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 138/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
SAP Personnel Development in the SAP LearningSolution
Figure 71: Personnel Development Functions in the SAP Learning Solution
The Skills Management functions are particularly relevant for the SAP Learning
Solution in the context of Personnel Development. This involves the relationship
between employee/requirements profile on the one hand and the course offeringson the other:
The “course imparts qualification” relationship lets you preselect courses that an
employee needs (urgently) from the course catalog directly in the SAP Learning
Portal. In addition, successful participation an (e-learning) course automatically
adds the corresponding qualifications to the employee's qualifications profile
in SAP HR Personnel Development.
130 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 139/394
HR270 Lesson: SAP Personnel Development
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Define the business process of Personnel Development
• Describe the integration with other SAP modules through the corresponding
interfaces
• Explain the Personnel Development data model based on object type
"Qualifications"
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 131
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 140/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
Lesson: Creating Scales/Qualifications Catalog
Lesson Overview
Participants learn how to create and structure a qualifications catalog.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create scales with corresponding proficiencies
• Create qualification groups
• Create qualifications
• Maintain additional data for qualifications
Business Example
You work in the Personnel Development department of your company and you
want to set up a comprehensive skills catalog that can be used by employees
globally.
You must familiarize yourself with the terminology used by SAP in the context
of personnel development. You must define globally-applicable rating scales
and assign them to the hierarchy of qualification groups and qualifications you
have set up.
Structure of the Qualifications Catalog
The application SAP ERP HR Personnel Development is also based on
object-oriented design.
The most important aspect of Personnel Development is the qualifications catalog.
The objects used in this context are qualification groups [object type QK] and
qualifications [object type Q]. These are used to structure and manage the catalog.
As described, qualifications are used when you define qualifications profiles and
requirements profiles. They can also be used when you define prerequisites for
course participation and objectives.
132 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 141/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Scales/Qualifications Catalog
Figure 72: Structure of the Qualifications Catalog
All of the skills, knowledge, and abilities that are of interest to a company can
be stored and managed as qualifications and requirements in the qualifications
catalog.
Skills and qualifications that logically belong together are combined to form
qualification groups. Qualification groups lend structure to the catalog.
Qualification groups can contain other subordinated qualification groups as well
as qualifications. Qualifications, in turn, can incorporate other qualifications.
The qualifications stored in the catalog are assigned to persons, jobs, positions,
courses, and development plans.
Hint: Qualification groups cannot be assigned to persons.
Defining Proficiency Scales
In many cases, it is not only relevant whether a job has “English” as a requirement,
for example, but also how good the applicant's English skills have to be in order
to meet the requirements for that job.
Proficiencies define qualifications in more detail. They are represented by
scales in SAP Personnel Development. Before you can create qualifications and
qualification groups, you must define at least one proficiency scale.
Sometimes it makes sense to have different scales for different qualifications.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 133
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 142/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
Figure 73: Editing Scales
When you maintain a qualification catalog, an appropriate scale is assigned to
each qualification, and you can adjust the descriptions of the proficiency levels as
needed.
Hint:
• The proficiency 0 is not supported for rating qualifications and
requirements.
• Quality scales are assigned to qualification groups, not to
qualifications. You must assign a proficiency scale to each
qualification group, which is then inherited initially by the
qualifications in the group.
• In hierarchically nested qualification groups, if there are different
scales defined, the scale that applies to the single qualifications is the
one defined for the qualification group on the next higher level.
• Scales are not inherited from one qualification group to another.
You can assign a validity period to qualifications. Validity periods allow you
to specify that certain qualifications, such as licences, can expire and must be
renewed at regular intervals.
For more detailed information goes beyond the scope of this overview, as well
as other features of SAP Personnel Development, we recommend attending the
course “SAP Personnel Development”.
134 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 143/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Scales/Qualifications Catalog
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Create scales with corresponding proficiencies
• Create qualification groups
• Create qualifications
• Maintain additional data for qualifications
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 135
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 144/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
Lesson: Assigning Qualifications to a Person
Lesson Overview
Participants receive an overview of employee profiles from the Personnel
Development component.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Display the qualifications profile (requirements profile) for persons (jobs)
• Create qualifications (requirements) for persons (jobs)
• Assign proficiencies to qualifications (requirements)
Business Example
You are an employee in the Personnel Development department and you want to
store qualifications with proficiencies in the employee profiles of the employees
in your company.
You need to know where to do this in the system and what points to be aware of.
You also have to know how this impacts the person's Learning Portal.
Maintaining Qualifications for a Person
Figure 74: Assigning Qualifications to a Person
136 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 145/394
HR270 Lesson: Assigning Qualifications to a Person
Based on the qualifications catalog and the organizational structure, you can create
profiles to manage, compare, and report on specific characteristics and data of
personnel planning objects (persons, positions, courses and so on).
Figure 75: Qualifications Subprofile
You can create profiles for employees containing data such as name, personnel
number, position, potentials, interests, appraisals received and created, and
development plans. The Qualifications subprofile is of particular relevance for theSAP Learning Solution.
Structure
You can assign qualifications from the qualifications catalog to the subprofile
Qualifications.
For each qualification, you can specify the degree of proficiency of the person.
Some qualifications are not rated.
Each qualification you assign has a validity period appended. Qualifications with
limited validity are stored in the subprofile for the duration of their validity.
Validity is calculated for each qualification individually, depending on the
relationship period.
Hint: There are also various ways of taking limited quality losses for
qualifications (such as “forgotten due to non-participation”) into account.
You can also enter a note for each qualification you assign.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 137
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 146/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
Maintaining Requirements for Jobs/Positions
Figure 76: Defining Position/Job Requirements
Qualifications stored in the Qualifications Catalog can be assigned equally to jobs
or positions. Requirements can be mapped in this way.
Figure 77: Requirements Subprofile
You can create a profile for jobs and positions, just as you do for employees.
In the case of jobs or positions, it is called a requirements profile. In the SAP
Learning Solution, the requirements profile is used to derive training proposals
for a learner as a result of a profile matchup between the learner's position and
current qualifications.
138 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 147/394
HR270 Lesson: Assigning Qualifications to a Person
Exercise 5: SAP Personnel Development:
Interaction with the Learning PortalExercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Check the impact of data from SAP HR Personnel Development on the
personalized display in the Learning Portal of the SAP Learning Solution.
Business Example
As a personnel development specialist you want to investigate how to make
requirements, qualifications, and corresponding training measures transparent in
the Learning Portal. You do this by comparing views in the portal before and after
you make settings in the ERP2005 back end system.
Hint: Make sure that you always use the current plan version 01, language
English, and a planning period of at least January 1 of this year to the end
of next year. These should already be the default settings.
Task 1:
In the Learning Portal, certain courses are listed as mandatory for you. You
suspect this has something to do with the Personnel Development (PE) component
in mySAP HR. Select curriculum type “Electronics Blended Learning” and check
how it is linked to your person.
1. Use transaction PP01 to search for relationships of curriculum type
“Electronics Blended Learning”. Is this blended learning prescribed as
mandatory for you based on your person or your job…?
Task 2:
You want to identify the connection between the back-end settings and the profile
matchup in the Learning Portal.
1. Run a profile matchup in the Learning Portal. Which qualification do youfail to meet sufficiently?
2. What course imparts this qualification?
3. Do the relationships stored for this qualification, Diode Skills help you to
see how the components interplay (requirement of your job, course type that
imparts it, your current assignment)? (Transaction PP01)
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 139
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 148/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
Solution 5: SAP Personnel Development:
Interaction with the Learning PortalTask 1:
In the Learning Portal, certain courses are listed as mandatory for you. You
suspect this has something to do with the Personnel Development (PE) component
in mySAP HR. Select curriculum type “Electronics Blended Learning” and check
how it is linked to your person.
1. Use transaction PP01 to search for relationships of curriculum type
“Electronics Blended Learning”. Is this blended learning prescribed as
mandatory for you based on your person or your job…?
a) Relationship Person-Mandatory courses
Start transaction PP01.
Select the object type “Curriculum Type” and use F4 to find the ID of
the course prescribed for you in the Learning Portal. You can search for
all course types that have “Elec” in their name, for example. Confirm
your choice by pressing Enter and select the “Relationships” infotype
and display the overview (by pressing shift and F8, for example).
Alternatively, you can click on the “Next Record” icon in the single
item view. This takes you to the “is mandatory for” relationships.
You see that Electronics Blended Learning is not mandatory for
you as a person, but it is for your organizational unit “Network andTelecommunication - Int”.
Continued on next page
140 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 149/394
HR270 Lesson: Assigning Qualifications to a Person
Task 2:
You want to identify the connection between the back-end settings and the profile
matchup in the Learning Portal.
1. Run a profile matchup in the Learning Portal. Which qualification do you
fail to meet sufficiently?
a) Qualifications link persons, jobs, and courses.
Click on Profile Matchup in the lower left. According to the explanation
of the red exclamation mark icon, the “Diode Skills” qualification is
mandatory for you and is assessed as of low importance.
Hint: The Personnel Development data should not be
considered to be “absolute”; it is merely for assistance. Youmay already know everything there is to know about diodes,
but you have not informed Personnel Development of this
fact, nor have you proven it with the corresponding courses.
Accordingly, this transparency in the Learning Portal will urge
employees to update their PD data.
2. What course imparts this qualification?
a) Click on qualification Diode Skills. The courses that impart these skills
will appear. make a note of them.
• Diode course (English)• Electronics Blended Learning
3. Do the relationships stored for this qualification, Diode Skills help you to
see how the components interplay (requirement of your job, course type that
imparts it, your current assignment)? (Transaction PP01)
a) As in exercise 1, call transaction PP01 and open the relationships of
the qualification you have been investigating, Diode Skills. Scroll to
the is imparted by relationships. You will see exactly the same courses
you noted above.
Now scroll to is met by – you will see that there is no relation to your
person (yet).
Ultimately, the is required by relation shows the link to your job
Technical Engineer I .
As you see, the personalized displays ultimately depend on the
corresponding relations in the back end system.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 141
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 150/394
Unit 5: Personnel Development HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Display the qualifications profile (requirements profile) for persons (jobs)
• Create qualifications (requirements) for persons (jobs)
• Assign proficiencies to qualifications (requirements)
142 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 151/394
HR270 Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Define the business process of Personnel Development
• Describe the integration with other SAP modules through the corresponding
interfaces
• Explain the Personnel Development data model based on object type
"Qualifications"
• Create scales with corresponding proficiencies
• Create qualification groups
• Create qualifications
• Maintain additional data for qualifications
• Display the qualifications profile (requirements profile) for persons (jobs)• Create qualifications (requirements) for persons (jobs)
• Assign proficiencies to qualifications (requirements)
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 143
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 152/394
Unit Summary HR270
144 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 153/394
Unit 6 Training Management
Unit Overview
You will be given an overview of the functions and options offered by the Training
Management System. You will learn how to navigate and work in the dynamic
menus, create a course catalog, update the course offering, and perform bookingactivities.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Describe the business processes in SAP Training Management
• Define the interfaces to other SAP modules
• Explain and maintain the various objects used in Training Management
• Design and set up a course catalog
• Implement “Blended Learning” in SAP Training Management
• Create courses with different delivery methods
• Group various courses together to form a curriculum (Blended Learning)
• Book, prebook, replace, rebook, and cancel participation in Training
Management
• Follow up on courses and describe the options for creating correspondence
in SAP Training Management
Unit Contents
Lesson: Training Management General Information .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .146Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... 156
Lesson: Creating Courses and Curricula .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..170Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 175
Exercise 6: SAP Training Management: New Options in the SAP
Learning Solution...........................................................181
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 145
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 154/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Lesson: Training Management General Information
Lesson Overview
This lesson provides you with an overview of Training Management and its
functions.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe the business processes in SAP Training Management
• Define the interfaces to other SAP modules
Business Example
You are a training manager and want to plan your courses in future to optimize
the necessary logistical activities and scheduling, as well as keep informed of
current courses and the training history of your employees at all times, through
appropriate data management. This also means defining the basics for ongoing
operations, such as schedules and resources.
Training Management Overview
The Training Management component in the SAP Learning Solution serves as the
administrative area, on the one hand, where the organizational data for the courseoffering is managed, and the administration and work area for central booking
operations and all associated functions, on the other.
Training Management in the SAP Learning Solution is comprised of two main
processes, each of which contains two sub-processes.
146 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 155/394
HR270 Lesson: Training Management General Information
Figure 78: Processes in Training Management
Course Offering
Creating the course offering involves the course preparation phase (data in the
training environment) and the course offering itself, the so-called course catalog.
Training Administration
Once the course offering has been set up and made available to learners in the
Learning Portal, booking activities and courses can be administered and updated
in Training Management on the back end.
To facilitate these processes, Training Management provides the technical working
environment in dynamic menus.
There are seven dynamic menus:
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 147
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 156/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
• Dynamic Course Menu
This contains all of the functions required for creating and editing
courses.
• Dynamic Participation Menu
This contains all of the functions that are associated with bookings
(book, prebook, cancel, and so on), as well as functions for the manual
output of correspondence, and reports for correspondence histories
and participant appraisals.
• Dynamic Information Menu
Here you can conduct analyses for participation, resources and courses,
as well as generate the corresponding reports.
• Dynamic Planning Menu
Lets you determine training requirements and schedule/create the
corresponding course dates.
• Dynamic Tool Menu
Here you can create and edit the core objects used in Training
Management: course groups, course types, courses, and participants by
means of the individual infotypes.
• Dynamic resource menu
Here you can manage the resources and resource types used in Training
Management.
• Master Data Catalog
Here you can create and maintain the type and content of courses used
in Training Management working from the course hierarchy structure.
148 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 157/394
HR270 Lesson: Training Management General Information
Figure 79: Working in Dynamic Menus
The advantage of working in these menus is that the structural display provides
you with a means of orientation and transparency while you are editing. Most of
the functions can be called from the context menu. To do so, you simply right-click
the object you want to edit (resource, course, booking) in the structure to display
the context menu with the functions that are active for the object. Training
coordinators and administrators have the additional option of personalizing the
menu views to suit their requirements.
Data in the Training Management Environment
General
Training Management master data for the SAP Learning Solution includes all
organizational data that is required for creating a course offering. Before you can
create a course offering, you must collect and catalog the data upon which it is
based. This data is accessed when you set up the catalog.
You maintain the master data under Current Settings as a preparation for setting
up the course offering.
Hint: You generally set up the initial master data in Customizing for
Training Management. Master data creation is not a one-off activity only
performed during the catalog preparation phase. For this reason, you have
the possibility of updating master data at any time from the application
itself under the menu option “Current Settings”.
Master Data / Data in the Training Management Environment
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 149
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 158/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Figure 80: Examples of Environment Data
Integration with other components allows access to resources through data that
has been maintained there. Instructors may already be maintained in Personnel
Administration, for example. Time schedules, on the other hand, can only be
created in Training Management.
Environment data includes:
• Cost elements
• Day segments
• Course locations and their addresses
• Building addresses
• Training providers
• Rooms
• Instructors
• Reusable resources, such as room equipment, and so on
Cost elements
The costs of a course are calculated and modeled as cost items in TrainingManagement. You need cost items if you want to use the functions for cost transfer
posting, internal activity allocation, and price proposal determination.
You use cost items to store costs for resources, resource types, courses, and course
types.
150 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 159/394
HR270 Lesson: Training Management General Information
Time Schedules
The time schedule defines the complete time plan for a course. A time schedule
can span several days and each day can contain up to three time blocks or time
segments.
Figure 81: Course Schedules
You must define the start and finish times and give them a unique name before
you can assign time schedules to courses.
The following procedure applies when creating a time schedule:
• As a rule, every course time block that exists in the company is entered in the
system, for example, some course days start at 9:00 a.m. and end at 5:00 p.m.
• A time schedule is then defined as a combination, such as a 3-day workshop.
• A time block is assigned to the schedule for each course day.
• The time schedule is then assigned to a course.
Course Locations
It is not mandatory to create locations. If you only use one location for all your
courses, you can deactivate the location switch altogether.
If you use locations, you must specify a location when you plan or create courses
that are location-dependent. In this case, a check is performed when you reserve
location-specific resources, such as rooms, for a course. The system only proposes
resources that are related with the location concerned.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 151
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 160/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
For this reason, location-dependent resources must be related with locations when
the location switch is active.
Figure 82: Locations and Resources
Creating Building Addresses
Building addresses specify where rooms are located. They can also be used in
connection with course locations.
Building addresses are required, for example, when there are training rooms in
multiple buildings on a campus.
In this case, when a room is created, the room address is recorded with referenceto a building address.
Training providers
Training providers can be external companies or internal departments/divisions.
Accordingly, they may already be defined in the systems as companies, suppliers,
or organizational units. The information associated with these objects may be
important for the correspondence with course participants (addresses and the like)
or for the organizational assignment of participants and instructors.
152 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 161/394
HR270 Lesson: Training Management General Information
Figure 83: Resource Types
Specific resources – such as rooms, instructors, or projectors – are classified into
categories to facilitate and simplify their administration. These categories are
referred to as resource types. The resource types available are Room, Instructor,
Material, and Other Resource.
Resource type is the abstract designation for the physical resource. Resource types
are allocated to course types. An important step when you create resource types
is maintaining the availability indicators for it. Availability indicators define the
attributes of resource types and their resources.
When you create a course, the system automatically proposes resources of a given
type, which you can then reserve for it depending on availability.The data you store for a resource type can be overridden by any you store for
the individual resources.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 153
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 162/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Resources
You can create resources in the following categories, corresponding to the
resource types:
• Rooms:
Rooms can contain other resources as equipment, such as PCs. You also
store capacity information for rooms using the Capacity infotype if this
information is not already inherited from the resource type. The system
compares the capacity of the room with that specified for the course to be
held in the room, and thus calculates the allowed number of bookings. If you
use rooms, you must create a relationship between a location and a room.
• Instructors:
You can create the relationship belongs to company for external instructors.
Otherwise, you store an address specifically for the instructor. Internal
instructors ( Persons) are defined in the personnel master data (that is, they
are already configured as employees).
• Material
If you use Material type resources, in other words, you use Materials
Management (integration), then you use the materials defined as material
masters.
• Other resources
Other resources include any resources that do not fall into the categoriesInstructor, Room, or Material from the material master.
154 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 163/394
HR270 Lesson: Training Management General Information
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Describe the business processes in SAP Training Management
• Define the interfaces to other SAP modules
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 155
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 164/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
Lesson Overview
You will receive an overview of the concepts behind setting up training catalogs
and learn what objects are required for setting up the catalog. You will learn which
objects and training methods you can use in Training Management, where to
maintain attributes and information, and how to display and use this information
and these attributes in the SAP Learning Portal.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain and maintain the various objects used in Training Management• Design and set up a course catalog
• Implement “Blended Learning” in SAP Training Management
Business Example
As a training administrator, you have - together with Personnel Development and
their instructors - developed a new training concept and new course offerings
that include e-learning as a component. It is your responsibility with setting up
an appropriate course catalog.
Creating a Course Catalog
Before the training administrator can create and make bookings for actual courses,
a course catalog must be set up. This involves defining and assigning the different
courses. This results of this task are reflected in the SAP Training Management
master data catalog. A course hierarchy can be set up in the relevant dynamic
menu. This hierarchy is used throughout Training Management . Course types
are created in the dynamic menu. They represent a “blueprint” for the actual
courses that are held.
156 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 165/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
Figure 84: Master Data Catalog (Hierarchy)
The hierarchical structure of the master data catalog (and of all dynamic menus)
displays course groups at the highest level of the structure. Other course groups
and the corresponding course types can be added below these. As illustrated
in the graphic, course groups represent subjects, topics, or subject areas (see
Learning Portal).
Training Management Data Model
The data model of Training Management helps you to understand the
enhancements offered by the SAP Learning Solution.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 157
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 166/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Figure 85: Training Management Data Model
The existing data model of Training and Event Management has basically been
retained for Training Management of the SAP Learning Solution. In other words,
the definition: “a course is a specialization of a course type, which in turn belongs
to a course group” still describes the exact chain of objects and their relationships.
The SAP Learning Solution has additional objects, infotypes and relationships.
These additional objects are required to map the major changes to processes
resulting from the shift from conventional training to e-learning.
Hint: The SAP HR PD data model, together with its objects and relations,
was already presented in the “Organizational Management” unit.
New Objects in Training Management: E-Learning
The e-learning (ET) object type exists in the Extension Set HR LSO 600 of the
SAP Learning Solution for courses that are not time-dependent.. The purpose of
these “virtual courses” is to enable bookings for e-learning courses.
158 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 167/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
Figure 86: Data model “Classroom Training”
In the previous version of Training and Event Management, persons were
prebooked for course types and then booked on the actual courses.
Figure 87: Data model “Web-Based Training (WBT)”
This concept does not really have much relevance anymore given that you do not
have to assign a time and location to a course. In principle, “participation” in aWBT takes place at the time the learner calls the WBT in the portal. In Training
Management, this is reflected by the fact that the portal user registers for a course
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 159
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 168/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
type, for example, WBT or Online Test. This triggers automatic generation of an
object type E-Learning (ET), which in turn enables participant assignment in
Training Management.
Hint: This ensures that these delivery methods are also displayed
dynamically in the catalog hierarchy in the participation and information
menus in Training Management.
New Objects in SAP Training Management: Curriculumand Curriculum Type
Figure 88: Blended Learning with the SAP Learning Solution
A curriculum type represents a structured training program that is designed to
impart a coherent set of skills and knowledge. The elements of a curriculum
build upon one another. This could be a trainee program, for example, or an
instructor-led course for SAP HR Essentials that has the prerequisite WBT course
ERP2005 Navigation including an online test.
The special characteristic of this course type is that it contains other course typesas elements (curriculum type elements). The elements can have different delivery
methods. They complement or build upon one another.
Caution: No nesting is possible, in other words, curriculum types cannot
contain other curriculum types as elements.
160 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 169/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
Technically speaking: a curriculum type (DC) consists of elements with the object
type Course Type (D), either
• with a predefined sequence (one element follows another)
or
• with no specific sequence (an element can occur anywhere in the curriculum).
The curriculum type specifies the structure and sequence of its courses. Other
features include:
• A consistency check: when you create a curriculum type, the system checks
the logic of the relationships between its elements. For example, it is
illogical if the third element in the curriculum imparts a qualification that is
a prerequisite for the first element.
• Definition of alternatives for curriculum type elements, so that one course
type can be replaced by another (equivalent) type.
Figure 89: Data Model for New Object Types
Similar to the course type-course concept, a curriculum type is the “blueprint” for a curriculum (which has time specifications appended). The delivery method is
naturally taken into account here. A curriculum is therefore made up of bookable
elements, that is, either courses (E) or, as in the case of WBTs, course types (D).
A special feature is the fact that when the curriculum type specifies classroom
training, you can select several course dates for the curriculum. In the Learning
Portal, selection options can be offered for date selection.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 161
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 170/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Setting Up a Course Catalog Hierarchy
The course catalog is comprised of course groups, course types (or curriculum
types), and courses (or curricula). Course groups together with course types,
courses, and the relationships that exist between them form a hierarchical
structure. You generally maintain these relationships when you create a new
object. The hierarchy itself is formed by the course groups alone, which can
have other subsidiary course groups: Languages-English-Business English could
represent one branch of course groups with “Business English for Managers” as
the course type at the end. You set up this hierarchy by restructuring the groups in
the master data catalog. To do this, you right-click the highest-level course group
and create the relevant assignment for it.
Hint: In the Learning Portal of the SAP Learning Solution, the learner canselect these course groups as “subject areas”when searching for courses.
You can specify whether a course group appears as a subject area in the
portal's navigation frame or not.
Creating Course Types
Figure 90: Creating a New Course Type - Delivery Methods
A course type is the grouping of courses that have the same objective, content, and
form. You can store all time-independent attributes of a course for the course type.
162 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 171/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
Using course types facilitates your work: all of the data stored for a course type
is proposed as default data when courses are planned or created. This data is
also displayed on the detail screen of the course in the SAP LS Portal and can bedisplayed by learners interested in finding out more information.
One of the most significant enhancements appears at precisely this point in the
SAP Learning Solution back end. We have referred several times to the different
delivery methods that are possible.
You must enter this information when you create a course type. The standard
system contains the following delivery methods:
• Classroom training
• Virtual classroom
• Web-Based Training
• Online test
• Static Web-Based Training
• External Web-Based Training
The delivery method determines what kind of information and which relationships
may be stored for a course type (D): location and time for classroom training,
assigned learning net from the repository for a WBT.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 163
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 172/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Depending on whether the delivery method is time-dependent or -independent, the
following infotypes may be proposed when you create a course type:
• Description: The Description infotype enables you to store descriptive
texts for a course type that can be included in the course brochure or in
the Learning Portal of the SAP Learning Solution on the course detail
screen. The infotype consists of the subtypes Extended Course Type, Course
Contents and Notes.
• Main schedule pattern (schedule model): You can define a time schedule
here that can be transferred (copied) automatically when course dates are
created or planned.
• Capacity: In the Capacity infotype, you specify the minimum, optimum, and
a maximum capacity for a course type. The capacity value you store for
the course type is used as the default value for the number of participants
for the actual course.
• Prices: In the Prices infotype, you can store an internal and an external price
for the course type. The internal price is used for internal activity allocation
purposes, while the external price is used for billing purposes.
• Course Type Info: In the Course Type Info infotype, you can determine
whether the course type will be added to the Course Brochure or not. When
you start the report to generate the course brochure, you can select the option
Selected course types only. The selection referred to is the one you make
when you set this indicator for the course type.
• Relationships: You can use the Relationships infotype to store links to a
number of other objects, such as course groups or organizational units, for the course type.
• Validity Period: Here you could, for example, specify in days and months
the period of time during which participation in a course event is valid as a
prerequisite for participating in a follow-up event.
• Additional Information
On this tab page, you can maintain the following additional infotypes:
– Course Demand
– Billing/Allocation Info
– Costs
– Procedure
– Web Link
– Knowledge Link
164 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 173/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
Caution: The SAP Learning Solution does not support convention
functions. If you do not want courses of this course type displayed in theLearning Portal of the SAP Learning Solution, select the No Intranet
indicator.
Hint: Most of the above data is optional. It is only mandatory to specify
the validity period, and the long and short name of a course.
However, the more information you store for the course type when you
create it, the less work you have with each of the individual courses
based on it.
Figure 91: No Web-Based Training Without Content
You should pay special attention to the Completion Specifications that can be
made for a WBT with reference to learning nets:
• Duration specifications (minimum, optimum, maximum)
• License period: how many days or months is the WBT accessible to learners?
• Date of last availability
Hint: Compare the options here with the information displayed on the
detail screen of the course in the Learning Portal.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 165
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 174/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Creating a Curriculum Type
Figure 92: Creating a Curriculum Type
Course types can be assigned to a curriculum type as curriculum type elements with
or without sequence rules. Elements with sequence rules must be completed in a
specified order in the curriculum, from the bottom position up. Elements without
sequence rules can be taken at any time during completion of the curriculum.
When you create a curriculum, you must first specify courses for the elements
with sequence rules. Then you select courses for the elements without sequence
rules. You can position elements without sequence rules between two elements
with sequence rules if you want.
You create a curriculum type with curriculum type elements in two steps:
1. Create the curriculum type
2. Add curriculum type elements
166 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 175/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
When you create a curriculum type, you maintain the required infotypes and
relationships, which are for the most part similar to those of the course types.
This also includes:
• Curriculum Type Info: Here you can specify guidelines for follow-up
processing and for system reactions to booking cancellations. Note:
Remember that in contrast to the similarities that otherwise exist, the
function of the Curriculum Type Info infotype is very different to that of the
Course Type Info infotype.
• Further Information: On this tab page, you can maintain the following
information:
– Procedure: In the Procedure infotype, you instruct the system how
to react during checks for double bookings, double prebookings,
participation prerequisites, and qualifications. After all, a curriculumelement may already have been booked as an individual course. In
addition, you also specify what follow-up actions are to be executed
during follow-up processing.
– Web Link
– Delivery Method
– Workflow Settings
Figure 93: Arranging Elements in Curriculum Types
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 167
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 176/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
In a second step, you select the curriculum type elements (also with a right-click
in the master data catalog). Course types that must be completed in a specific
sequence are displayed in the upper field. The position specifies the sequence.If elements have the same position, the learner can decide the order in which
to complete them.
Elements with no specified sequence are displayed in the lower field. These
elements can be taken at any time in any order.
168 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 177/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating a Course Catalog
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Explain and maintain the various objects used in Training Management
• Design and set up a course catalog
• Implement “Blended Learning” in SAP Training Management
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 169
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 178/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Lesson: Creating Courses and Curricula
Lesson Overview
You will learn how to maintain and offer course dates (classroom training), as well
as how to compose “Blended Learning” offerings.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create courses with different delivery methods
• Group various courses together to form a curriculum (Blended Learning)
Business Example
Now that you have implemented the new training concept in a course catalog,
you will now begin the detailed planning of the individual courses. In particular,
this means defining the dates.
Course
Figure 94: Creating a Course
As explained previously, a course is a specific “instance” of a course type with a
start date and an end date. This attribute itself indicates that the object Course is
used exclusively for time-dependent courses. Courses are created in such a way
that the sum of their individual capacities can satisfy the number of prebookings
made for the course type. The training administrator must consider a number of
other important aspects as well: the time frame in which the courses are offered,
the technical requirements at the course location and so on.
170 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 179/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Courses and Curricula
For example, you can create classroom training courses with or without
resources. It is always possible to reserve resources for courses at a later date.
You usually work in the dynamic course menu when you want to create specificcourses (transaction LSO_PSV2). In the course hierarchy, you create courses for
course types by right-clicking the course type concerned.
On the data screen that then appears, you can enter data such as start and end date,
time schedule, location, capacity, and (internal and external) prices.
You do not specify location data for courses with the delivery method virtual
classroom training (you select the course type in the SAP Learning Solution).
Once a course has been created, bookings can be made for it both by learners in
the Learning Portal and by the training administrator.
Hint: Remember that the training administrator cannot create courseswith the delivery method WBT. E-Learning courses are generated when
these courses are booked in the Learning Portal.
If any of the other information fields are not self-explanatory, you can display the
online help for them or visit the specific Training and Event Management course
by SAP Education.
Curriculum
Features
• You create curricula by arranging courses in a specific sequence.
• The sequence is specified by the curriculum type.
• Possible course dates are automatically proposed to the training
administrator.
• You can propose multiple alternative courses for course types. These
can be integrated in a curriculum and offered for selection later.
• You book a curriculum in one step!
The curriculum type represents the basis for the blended learning concept. When
you create a curriculum, the important thing is to design a suitable training
package. This may involve specifying dates for classroom training courses.However, you might create two curricula parallel for the same time period to
enable “ classroom instruction” for a given course.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 171
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 180/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Figure 95: Creating a Curriculum
A curriculum is created on the basis of its curriculum type. The planned
time frame and language of the courses are important attributes that are often
overlooked. These attributes determine what courses are proposed for the course
types in the curriculum.
Hint: We recommend that you first create the courses for the
time-dependent course types. These can then be selected when a
curriculum is being created.
Once you have set up the general conditions surrounding the curriculum, the
actual curriculum can be created. You start with the course type paying attention
to the sequence (compare Creating a Curriculum Type). The course types appear
one after another in sequence at the top left. The corresponding courses for the
selected period are displayed for selection on the right.
Hint: Only courses that are scheduled after the last date of the previous course are offered, for example. This excludes the possibility of
inconsistencies with the sequence rules.
You select the required courses (press STRG/CTRL when selecting) and transfer
them to the curriculum. This is the trigger for the next course type to appear
in the top left.
172 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 181/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Courses and Curricula
When you have edited all course types with and without sequence rules, you can
save the curriculum. You can only save the curriculum as active after all courses
have been entered in the curriculum for all course types in the curriculum type.
When you select several courses for a course type, multiple dates are offered as
alternatives and integrated in the curriculum. This is where the possible courses
for selection in the SAP Learning Portal are derived.
Figure 96: Book a Participant for a Curriculum (Back End)
The training administrator can book participants on a curriculum as for other
time-dependent course too in the dynamic participation menu in the back end. The
advantage of doing so is that when you book a curriculum, the individual courses
are booked at the same time. The administrator can select specific courses as
alternatives for individual participants.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 173
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 182/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Create courses with different delivery methods
• Group various courses together to form a curriculum (Blended Learning)
174 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 183/394
HR270 Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
Lesson Overview
You will learn about the various booking activities and possible follow-up
activities in Training Management. You will also receive a brief overview of
correspondence in SAP Training Management.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Book, prebook, replace, rebook, and cancel participation in Training
Management
• Follow up on courses and describe the options for creating correspondencein SAP Training Management
Business Example
We will now examine a normal day in the business life of a training administrator:
the courses are planned and you now only have to organize the participants.
Day-To-Day Activities
The day-to-day activities in Training Management include all booking activities
performed in the back-end system of the SAP Learning Solution and follow-upactivities for completed courses.
• Prebooking participants for classroom training and curricula
• Booking participants for classroom training and curricula
• Rebooking participation in classroom training and curricula
• Canceling participation in classroom training and curricula
• Replacing participation in classroom training and curricula
Prebooking Participation
Prebookings are made when there are no suitable dates scheduled for a course a participant wants to take.
You can specify a preferred language, location, and time period for the required
course.
Prebooking data can be used to support short-term planning of courses and also
for yearly or half-yearly demand analyses if this is included in the company's
business processes.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 175
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 184/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Booking Participation
Learners make bookings for time- and location-dependent courses directly in the
Learning Portal.
Classroom training and curricula bookings can be made both in the Learning
Portal of the SAP Learning Solution and in Training Management.
• Persons
• Contact persons
• Applicants
• External persons
• Users
• Organizational units• Companies
• Customers
• Interested parties
The various participant types can be booked for courses individually or from a
list in a group booking.
You can set up Training Management to recognize and report whether prebookings
already exist when bookings are made.
You can generally check when booking participation whether there is a prebooking
list for the course type. These prebookings can be converted into bookings.When you book participation, you can specify a booking priority for the
participant. The priority indicates how urgent participation is.
Booking Priorities
0-9 Essential booking Default value is 9
10-89 Normal booking Default value is 50
90-99 Waiting-list booking Default value is 90
You can change the priorities during editing.
In the standard system, bookings made in the Learning Portal are assigned priority
of 51. The training administrator/coordinator can usually see immediately from
the priority value which bookings were made in the SAP Learning Portal and
which ones came from the back end.
176 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 185/394
HR270 Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
Rebookings
You can change the date of a booking, when requested. The participant can be
rebooked for the same course type on a different date or for a completely different
course.
A prebooking check is performed here too.
Caution: Of course, you cannot rebook participants from the user-specific
Learning Portal.
Cancellations
You can cancel a booking if the participant requires it. You can also specify
a cancellation reason.
Caution: You cannot cancel participation from the Learning Portal.
Replacing Participants
If a participant is unable to attend a course on a given date, a replacement
participant can be found and booked instead. The cancellation of the original
participant and the new booking of the replacement is performed in one step.
A prebooking check is performed here too.
You cannot replace participants from the Learning Portal.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 177
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 186/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Correspondence in SAP Training Management
The various activities in Training Management can trigger output of accompanying
correspondence.
Hint: With the LSO 600 you have the option of using completely new
technology for the correspondence. This will be explained at the end of
the course.
• Numerous templates for notifications
– Participation confirmation
– Provisional confirmation of place
– Course cancellations – etc.
• Standard letter function
• Download into Microsoft® Word (RTF Format)
• Output via all standard media (fax, Internet mail, etc.)
• Workflow for errors in automatic correspondence
• Correspondence history
Whenever an activity in Training Management requires a notification, the
corresponding correspondence can be output automatically or manually.
Different forms of output media are possible: printer, Internet mail, telefax,onscreen, etc. With manual output, you also have the option of using Microsoft®
Word standard letter function and of downloading the notification into Microsoft®
Word.
Automatic correspondence is triggered by activities in the SAP Learning Solution
that you define as correspondence-relevant, such as booking participation.
An error workflow for automatic correspondence informs administrators of any
errors that might occur in output.
Notification output is documented in the Correspondence History function.
This enables you, for example, to report on what documents were output to a
participant in a given time period or whether a participant has already received a booking confirmation or not.
As mentioned above, templates are available for the various types of
training-related correspondence. These can be customized as required.
178 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 187/394
HR270 Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
Recurring Activities
Figure 97: Recurring Activities - Overview
Recurring activities are all activities that can be carried out periodically. These
include firmly booking, canceling and following up courses, and creating
appraisals for courses and participants.Firmly book courses
You firmly book a course when you have decided that it should definitely take
place and you want to record all of the data stored for it.
When you firmly book a course, its status changes from planned to active.
The system proposes a definitive participant list. Depending on the
number of bookings, participants on the waiting list are moved up until the
optimum/maximum course capacity is reached.
You then have the option of swapping participants on the waiting list with
participants on the participant list.You can either create rebooking proposals for waiting list candidates or leave them
on the waiting list; (referred to as the rebooking list). The rebooking list can be
handled like a prebooking list.
You do not need to firmly book e-learning courses. They are created with firmly
booked status from the start.
Caution: Firmly booking a course is irrevocable, it cannot be undone.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 179
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 188/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Course cancellations
When a course is canceled, resources reserved for it are released. Participants
booked for the course can be rebooked for other courses. The system displays
suitable alternatives where available.
A delete flag is appended to the course.
Caution: Canceling a course is irrevocable, it cannot be undone.
Hint: You cannot cancel e-learning courses.
Following Up Courses
When a course has been held, you can flag it accordingly.
During follow-up processing, the qualification it imparts can be awarded to the
participants. You can also issue participation certificates within Correspondence.
You can also record the course data historically, which ultimately means changing
its status. You can set view options in the dynamic menus to hide courses that have
historical record flags and courses that have been completed.
Appraising Courses
Appraisals in the SAP Learning Solution
• Appraisals of participants and courses
• Anonymous appraisals
• Generating a 'to do' list (appraisal preparation)
• Multiple appraisal models per form of appraisal (course or participant
appraisal)
• Qualifications as appraisal criteria
• Transfer of qualifications as a result of appraisals (on completion of the
appraisal)
• Access to appraisals during follow-up processing
• Search for objects not yet appraised
The SAP Learning Solution uses the Management by Objectives component
(MbO) to enable appraisal functions.
180 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 189/394
HR270 Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
Exercise 6: SAP Training Management:
New Options in the SAP Learning SolutionExercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• List the functions of SAP Training Management
• Create course types with various delivery methods
• Create a blended learning concept
• Set up a curriculum
Business ExampleAs training administrator for your enterprise, you want to use the enhanced options
offered by SAP Training Management to integrate WBT courses in Training and
Event Management and offer employees a blended learning solution.
Hint: Make sure that you have configured the current plan version 01,
language English (or all languages), and a planning period of at least
January 1 of this year to the end of next year.
Task 1:
You want to use courses with various delivery methods when putting together anew curriculum in your Training Management system.
1. In the SAP Learning Solution master data catalog, create a course group
“SAPLS##” (long and short name) under the course group “HR270 core
group”. Enter as the general description “New Employee Orientation ##”.
The course group should not appear as a subject area in its own right in the
portal.
2. Create a course type “WS ##”(long text “Workshop ##”) under this course
group. Use the delivery method Classroom Training.
Description: This is an “introductory seminar” (Extended Course Text),
enter as a note “Use public transport to get here!”. As main schedule pattern“without pattern”, enter a duration of a 5-hour day. Optimum capacity is 15
participants, with a tolerance of ±5. The price is 1000 euros, or 2000 euros
for external participants.
3. Create another course type “WBT ##” (long and short text) under this course
group. Use the delivery method WBT. Enter “Getting Started with the
SAP System” (or another learning net specified by your instructor) as the
content of the learning net.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 181
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 190/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
Description: enter an intuitive descriptive text for your WBT. Under
Completion Specifications, specify completion time of 10 ± 5 minutes and a
license period of 20 days.
4. In the dynamic course menu, create 2 course dates for the introductory
seminar “Workshop ##” (right-click/“without resources”) for December of
this year. Create them in firmly booked status. You specify the dates with
the start of the planning period, which you select as today. Select Berlin and
Zurich as course locations. Note that the dates should not occur after the
3rd of Advent.
Task 2:
Your company wants to be offer a blended learning solution for new employees in
the new Learning Portal. You are asked to make the administrative preparations.1. Create a curriculum type called “BL_Intro_##” under course group “HR270”
in the master data catalog.
As description/content, enter “Blended Learning Solution for New Hire
Orientation”. When you save, take the opportunity of creating the curriculum
elements at the same time. Your blended learning solution is made up
of the two course types you created. You will add to this the course
“Get_Together”, which already exists. The workshop should of course take
place before this final event. The WBT can be completed by participants any
time during the curriculum.
2. In the Course Menu, create a curriculum of the type “Blended_Int##” that isvalid from today until December 31 of this year.
Task 3:
Check your settings from the user's perspective in the Learning Portal and in
the Participation Menu.
1. Find the curriculum you created in the Learning Portal under “HR270”.
2. Make a booking for this curriculum for dates of your choice.
3. Check the training activities.
4. Start your WBT and browse through a few pages.
5. Check your participation data and your “learning progress” in the WBT in
the relevant menus in the back end.
182 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 191/394
HR270 Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
Solution 6: SAP Training Management:
New Options in the SAP Learning SolutionTask 1:
You want to use courses with various delivery methods when putting together a
new curriculum in your Training Management system.
1. In the SAP Learning Solution master data catalog, create a course group
“SAPLS##” (long and short name) under the course group “HR270 core
group”. Enter as the general description “New Employee Orientation ##”.
The course group should not appear as a subject area in its own right in the
portal.
a) Working in the Master Data Catalog of the SAP Learning Solution
SAP Easy Access: Human Resources→ SAP Learning Solution→
Settings→ Current Settings→ Master Data Catalog
Note the settings under “Current Plan” at the top. Use the corresponding
icon to find course group HR270 or open the path SAP Courses -
HR - HR270 core group.
Right-click the course group HR270 core group, choose Create Level
Lower, Course Group. Before you save, enter a short text (such as
“Courses for New Employees” in tab page Description.
Hint: Deactivate the “subject area” option under Info Course
Group to prevent its display in the portal's navigation frame.
2. Create a course type “WS ##”(long text “Workshop ##”) under this course
group. Use the delivery method Classroom Training.
Description: This is an “introductory seminar” (Extended Course Text),
enter as a note “Use public transport to get here!”. As main schedule pattern
“without pattern”, enter a duration of a 5-hour day. Optimum capacity is 15
participants, with a tolerance of ±5. The price is 1000 euros, or 2000 euros
for external participants.
a) Right-click your course group, choose Create Level Lower.
Double-click incorporates course group and then Classroom Training.
Choose the different tab pages to make the required entries for the
course type. On the Main Schedule Model tab page, ensure to choose
the “Schedule without pattern” tab page.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 183
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 192/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
3. Create another course type “WBT ##” (long and short text) under this course
group. Use the delivery method WBT. Enter “Getting Started with the
SAP System” (or another learning net specified by your instructor) as thecontent of the learning net.
Description: enter an intuitive descriptive text for your WBT. Under
Completion Specifications, specify completion time of 10 ± 5 minutes and a
license period of 20 days.
a) Proceed as for 6-1-2 and select Web-Based Training as the delivery
method. When you specify the name and code and press “Enter”, you
automatically branch to the required entry field for the content type
(learning net). You can select one using F4 possible entries help.
If you do not enter a price, the WBT remains free of charge.
4. In the dynamic course menu, create 2 course dates for the introductory
seminar “Workshop ##” (right-click/“without resources”) for December of
this year. Create them in firmly booked status. You specify the dates with
the start of the planning period, which you select as today. Select Berlin and
Zurich as course locations. Note that the dates should not occur after the
3rd of Advent.
a) SAP Easy Access: Human Resources→ SAP Learning Solution→
Courses→ Course Menu
Open your course group (double-click on SAPLS## and right-click
your workshop ##, then click “Create Without Resources”. Select a
start date in December of this year and enter “Berlin” under Location.You are offered a list of possible locations in Berlin for selection. Save.
Repeat the process for another date, with Zurich as the location.
Task 2:
Your company wants to be offer a blended learning solution for new employees in
the new Learning Portal. You are asked to make the administrative preparations.
1. Create a curriculum type called “BL_Intro_##” under course group “HR270”
in the master data catalog.
As description/content, enter “Blended Learning Solution for New Hire
Orientation”. When you save, take the opportunity of creating the curriculum
elements at the same time. Your blended learning solution is made up
of the two course types you created. You will add to this the course
Continued on next page
184 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 193/394
HR270 Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
“Get_Together”, which already exists. The workshop should of course take
place before this final event. The WBT can be completed by participants any
time during the curriculum.
a) Create a curriculum type
SAP Easy Access: Human Resources→ SAP Learning Solution→
Settings→ Current Settings→ Master Data Catalog
Right-click “HR270”, choose Create Level Lower, double-click
Curriculum Type and make the required entries. Choose Save. Choose
Create New in the dialog box that appears to query whether you want
to create curriculum elements. Click on the plus icon at the right of
“include sequence rules” frame. This takes you to the search menu
where you can first add the workshop and then the get-together seminar.
In the lower frame, add your WBT in the same way. Choose Save.
2. In the Course Menu, create a curriculum of the type “Blended_Int##” that is
valid from today until December 31 of this year.
a) SAP Easy Access: Human Resources→ SAP Learning Solution→
Courses→ Course Menu
Right-click your curriculum type and choose “Create Curriculum”.
Select “today” as the start date and “English” as the language. In the
upper right frame, select the top workshop date, hold down the shift
key and select the last workshop so that both are highlighted. Choose
“Next” to assign both course dates to your curriculum. Do the same
with the next two courses as well. Choose Save.
Task 3:
Check your settings from the user's perspective in the Learning Portal and in
the Participation Menu.
1. Find the curriculum you created in the Learning Portal under “HR270”.
a) Connection between Portal, Participation Menu and Information Menu
(first steps as in exercises “Learning Portals” - see solutions)
Search for your curriculum in the Portal by clicking on “HR270” in the
navigation frame. Of course, you can also search for all curricula in theextended search function, and so on.
2. Make a booking for this curriculum for dates of your choice.
a) Book it via Date Selection, for example, the course scheduled for
Berlin.
3. Check the training activities.
a) In the Portal, choose Training Activities.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 185
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 194/394
Unit 6: Training Management HR270
4. Start your WBT and browse through a few pages.
a) Start the WBT for your curriculum (assignment is visible in the portal).
You can skip the test with Complete.
Click “Continue” several times before you click “Complete”.
5. Check your participation data and your “learning progress” in the WBT in
the relevant menus in the back end.
a) SAP Easy Access: Human Resources→ SAP Learning Solution→
Participation→ Participation Menu
Refresh your training activities in the Learning Portal before you
record your progress.
Open your curriculum and your courses in sequence in the participation
menu under Human Resources → SAP Learning Solution→
Participation. You will see your participation (your user from exercise
2 “Technical Essentials” appears as booked). Choose “Goto” in
the Information Menu, right-click your WBT, choose Participation
and execute the report “Participant List”. As administrator, you can
see in the back end how many minutes you spent on exercise step 4.
This figure should agree with the learning progress displayed in the
Learning Portal.
186 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 195/394
HR270 Lesson: Day-To-Day Activities and Other Activities
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Book, prebook, replace, rebook, and cancel participation in Training
Management
• Follow up on courses and describe the options for creating correspondence
in SAP Training Management
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 187
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 196/394
Unit Summary HR270
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Describe the business processes in SAP Training Management
• Define the interfaces to other SAP modules
• Explain and maintain the various objects used in Training Management
• Design and set up a course catalog
• Implement “Blended Learning” in SAP Training Management
• Create courses with different delivery methods
• Group various courses together to form a curriculum (Blended Learning)
• Book, prebook, replace, rebook, and cancel participation in Training
Management
• Follow up on courses and describe the options for creating correspondencein SAP Training Management
188 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 197/394
Unit 7 Collaboration
Unit Overview
You will learn the basics of collaboration with SAP NetWeaver and its relevance
for the SAP Learning Solution – and particularly the SAP Learning Portal.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Explain how the collaboration rooms in the SAP Enterprise Portal can be
and are important for the SAP Learning Solution
• List the collaboration options that SAP Netweaver could provide for the SAP
Learning Portal too.
• Explain how collaboration in the SAP Enterprise Portal is linked directly
with the SAP Learning Portal
• List the steps in SAP LS Training Management that can or need to be used
in order to link collaboration rooms directly with the courses offered in the
SAP Learning Portal.
• Set up a new collaboration room automatically when you configure a course,
making all the course participants members of the room
Unit Contents
Lesson: Collaboration in the SAP Learning Portal .........................190Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management.. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .195
Exercise 7: Collaboration in the SAP Learning Solution ..............203
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 189
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 198/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
Lesson: Collaboration in the SAP Learning Portal
Lesson Overview
This lesson will teach you about the interesting benefits that arise from using the
modern collaboration features in the SAP Learning Portal.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain how the collaboration rooms in the SAP Enterprise Portal can be
and are important for the SAP Learning Solution
• List the collaboration options that SAP Netweaver could provide for the SAP
Learning Portal too.
• Explain how collaboration in the SAP Enterprise Portal is linked directly
with the SAP Learning Portal
Business Example
You are a teletutor who wants to find out about the collaboration options in your
enterprise portal and how they can be used in the Learning Portal framework.
Motivation
Figure 98: The KM Platform as the Integration Basis for Collaboration
190 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 199/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in the SAP Learning Portal
An important tool for overcoming a learner's isolation in e-learning scenarios is
the use of modern collaboration technology, such as e-mail and chat rooms, to
create something like a "virtual classroom". In the SAP LS, we recommend usingthe collaboration tools of the SAP Enterprise Portal for this purpose, and integrate
it directly in training management in the SAP Learning Solution. In the following,
the collaboration concept in SAP NetWeaver is introduced in general, before going
on to its specific implementation in the SAP Learning Solution.
Collaboration with SAP NetWeaver
Figure 99: Collaboration with SAP NetWeaver
As you can see in the above diagram, SAP NetWeaver collaboration consists of
several components. In addition to the usual discussion groups and file sharing
options, external products such as WebEx can also be used for synchronized
collaboration. The HR overview course "Introduction to the SAP Portal" provides
you with an initial impression.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 191
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 200/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
Figure 100: Structure of Collaboration Rooms
The (collaboration) portal administrator decides whether and how the different
options – news board, membership lists, to-do lists with progress displays, and so
on – are available in these virtual collaboration rooms. The first step is usually
the creation of appropriate templates. The users are then assigned to the specific
collaboration room itself, given roles, and granted authorizations. The most
important roles are usually "room owner" and "room member".
Collaboration in the SAP Learning Portal
As mentioned above, collaboration rooms are particularly useful as virtual
classrooms for modern Blended Learning courses. The teletutor performs the
role of the room owner in this case, and supports the learning process by asking
specific follow-up questions and moderating the discussion groups.
192 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 201/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in the SAP Learning Portal
Figure 101: Collaboration Rooms in the Training Activities Overview
To make sure learners can still keep track of their training activities, the SAP
Learning Portal makes it possible to navigate directly from the training activities
to the corresponding collaboration rooms. The links appear directly below the
respective courses.
Figure 102: A Collaboration Room in the Learning Portal
By clicking on this link you will see a selection of suitable collaboration rooms.
This supports the creation of a kind of "classroom" for exchanging useful
information between the participants.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 193
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 202/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Explain how the collaboration rooms in the SAP Enterprise Portal can be
and are important for the SAP Learning Solution
• List the collaboration options that SAP Netweaver could provide for the SAP
Learning Portal too.
• Explain how collaboration in the SAP Enterprise Portal is linked directly
with the SAP Learning Portal
194 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 203/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
Lesson Overview
In this lesson, you will learn about the steps required to use collaboration in
Training Management within the SAP Learning Solution.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• List the steps in SAP LS Training Management that can or need to be used
in order to link collaboration rooms directly with the courses offered in the
SAP Learning Portal.
• Set up a new collaboration room automatically when you configure a course,making all the course participants members of the room
Business Example
You are the training administrator in your company and want to include modern
collaboration tools in your Blended Learning and integrate them in the Learning
Portal.
Concept and Functions
Figure 103: Learner and Collaboration Rooms in Training Administration
A training administrator has two basic options for linking a course to a
collaboration room. If the collaboration room already exists, you simply link it
to the course in question. Frequently, however, collaboration rooms need to be
created for specific courses. In this case, you can configure the settings to trigger a
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 195
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 204/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
new collaboration room automatically whenever a course is set up. To do so, a
template for the SAP Enterprise Portal has to be defined in Customizing for the
SAP Learning Solution.
Figure 104: Assigning Collaboration
In general, all object types in the SAP Learning Solution's master data catalog can
be equipped with collaboration options. In accordance with the structure of SAPHR, you do this using relationships too. You can maintain these relationships
directly in PP01, for example. The object types in the master data catalog are then
linked to the corresponding collaboration infotype, and are divided into 5045
Collaboration Room and 5046 Template for Collaboration Room. The respective
uses for each type should be obvious: The first is used to link with specific
collaboration rooms that already exist. The latter is used to define which type of
collaboration room will be used for a specific course.
196 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 205/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
Figure 105: Inheritance of Collaboration
The crux of relationships with specific object types is that they are inherited to
all other object types that appear in lower levels of the hierarchy. If you create a
relationship between a collaboration room and the Business English course group,
all the participants on the assigned courses “Business English for Beginners”,
“Business English Advanced Level” and “Business English for Distant Learners
(WBT)” would be assigned to this collaboration room by default, for example.
This could be a practical way of reaching the “critical mass” of participants to
keep the room exciting and up to date.
Figure 106: Involved Training Administration Processes
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 197
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 206/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
For the training administrator, the direct link to courses (and course types) also
link similar activities for participant management of collaboration rooms, as it
would do for classroom training. The list of activities in the above diagram istherefore identical to the processes introduced in the “Training Management” unit.
Figure 107: Infotype 5045 User Interface
For infotype 5045 specifically, this means the following functions are listed:
• Assign an existing room
• Create a new room
• Create a where-used list for the room
• Manage the attributes of the room (such as viewing options)
• Specify procedure instructions for typical Training Management processes
(bookings, cancellations)
198 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 207/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
Figure 108: Infotype 5046: Collaboration Room Template
A collaboration room template includes all the information that is required to
create a collaboration room. The purpose of this infotype is to enable collaboration
for ETs that have not yet been created. When the ET is created, the system creates
an infotype 5045 for this ID with its own ID.
Maintaining the Collaboration Room Infotype
Figure 109: Assignment of a Collaboration Room
When a course is assigned to a specific room, the familiar F4 help is available.
Although this is not readily apparent to the training administrator, this involves
accessing the connected SAP Portal to retrieve the current list.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 199
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 208/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
Figure 110: Creating a Collaboration Room
When a new collaboration room is created, the template is selected first from
Customizing. The necessary attributes are then maintained before the actual room
is created in the portal (system).
Figure 111: Procedure Instructions
As you can see in the above diagram, the settings for the procedure instructions
are largely intuitive:
Display
200 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 209/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
You can control the display of the collaboration room assigned to a course in the
Learning Portal. The following display options apply:
Display in portal: If there are no participants booked for a course, you specify in
Customizing (IMG activity: Maintain Default Values) whether the collaboration
room assigned should be displayed in the Learning Portal or not.
If there are participants booked for a course, all the collaboration rooms assigned
to it are always displayed in the Learning Portal.
Use exclusively: The collaboration room may only be used by this course in the
Learning Portal. This enables you to protect a collaboration room from being used
by other courses. If you flag a collaboration room for exclusive use, it is not
offered for selection in the room search. You cannot use the exclusive room ID
to create a new room.
Sorting priority: With the sorting priority you specify the position of the
collaboration room in the list of available collaboration rooms.
Post
Book participation: You specify whether a learner is automatically registered as
participant of the collaboration room when he or she is booked for a course. If
learners are automatically included as collaboration room members on booking,
the learner is registered as a member from the booking date.
You must also assign a role profile and specify which roles the participant
should be given in the collaboration room. The participant is registered in the
collaboration room with the roles entered in the role profile.
You can specify if a participant should be informed by e-mail when he or she is
registered as a new member of a collaboration room.
Do not book participation: You specify that when a learner is booked for a
course, he or she is not automatically registered as a member of the collaboration
room. You can change the collaboration room participation later for a participant
from the dynamic participation menu or using the Participant List report
(RHTEILNO_LSO).
Cancel Participation/Course
You specify the system reactions when a course or course participation is canceled.
You can choose from the following options:
Leave participation unchanged: You can leave collaboration room participation
unchanged when a booking or a course is canceled. No change should be made,
in other words, the collaboration room is retained and the participant retains the
role assigned in the collaboration room.
Delete participation in a collaboration room: When a participant cancels a
course, you can delete the associated collaboration room membership and/or the
collaboration room itself. This means that participation in a collaboration room is
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 201
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 210/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
deleted when a course booking is canceled. When the course itself is canceled, the
associated collaboration room is deleted if it is not being used by other objects.
All room memberships are also deleted.
Change role: You can retain collaboration room participation when a booking or a
course is canceled but delete the role assignments and the role profile.
Follow Up Participation/Course
You specify system reactions when a course or a participation record is followed
up. The options here are largely the same as for canceling a course.
202 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 211/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
Exercise 7: Collaboration in the SAP
Learning SolutionExercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Use the operations for collaboration in the SAP Portal
• Create a link between a course in the SAP back end and a collaboration in
the SAP (Learning) Portal
Business Example
You are a potential teletutor at your company and want to find out about theoptions for collaboration available within the SAP Learning Solution.
Task 1:
Use the collaboration tools in the portal. Go to the “Collaboration” tab in your
Learning Portal. Use the synchronous and asynchronous communication options
there.
1. Open the appropriate collaboration room.
2. Check the tasks. Is there a task that has already been completed? Have tasks
been assigned specifically to you? If so, what are these tasks?
3. Read a FAQ. Make a new FAQ available to the other participants. To do this,
use an Internet link, such as one to the homepage of your company.
4. Post a message in the discussion forum for HR270.
5. In the HR270 folder, open a Success Story for the Learning Solution that
has been stored here.
Task 2:
You want to add a collaboration room to the blended learning course you just
created.
1. Create a collaboration room called Training in the back end system for thecurriculum you just created.
Choose the SAP standard template and set your portal user to “room
administrator”. Keep the other settings and enter the name “Virtual
Classroom” for the room.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 203
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 212/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
Task 3:
You are a teletutor who uses several different communication tools.
1. Log on to the portal again and open “your” room
2. Invite another course participant (your number + 1, for example) to become
a member of your room.
3. Create a subfolder “HR270”.
4. Copy a file of your choice from your desktop (simply create a Word or
PowerPoint document and save it there) to the folder and add a personal
remark.
204 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 213/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
Solution 7: Collaboration in the SAP
Learning SolutionTask 1:
Use the collaboration tools in the portal. Go to the “Collaboration” tab in your
Learning Portal. Use the synchronous and asynchronous communication options
there.
1. Open the appropriate collaboration room.
a) Click the “Collaboration” tab next to your “Learner” tab and then click
the link “HR270-EN”. The collaboration room is opened. Use the
navigation bar to the left to navigate your way through the various
components.
2. Check the tasks. Is there a task that has already been completed? Have tasks
been assigned specifically to you? If so, what are these tasks?
a) Use the “next page” icon under the task overview to find a teletutor
task that has been 100% completed.
Click on the “Assigned Tasks” tab page. There you can see a task that
has been assigned to you personally. Click on the link for details. It
will come as no surprise that this task is linked to the task you have to
solve in HR270 at the moment.
3. Read a FAQ. Make a new FAQ available to the other participants. To do this,use an Internet link, such as one to the homepage of your company.
a) Under “Room News”, click on one of the messages and then click on
“New Frequently Asked Questions” at the top. Use the fields provided
in the new window and then click on the “Save” button at the bottom
left when you have finished. Check the result under Room News.
4. Post a message in the discussion forum for HR270.
a) Click “Discussion” in the left navigation frame. Then click on the topic
HR270 Target Group and further in the discussion, if necessary. “New
Post”. Edit your post and click Save to submit it.
5. In the HR270 folder, open a Success Story for the Learning Solution thathas been stored here.
a) Click on “Documents” in the left navigation frame. Click on the folder
“HR270” and then on one of the two documents.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 205
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 214/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
Task 2:
You want to add a collaboration room to the blended learning course you just
created.
1. Create a collaboration room called Training in the back end system for the
curriculum you just created.
Choose the SAP standard template and set your portal user to “room
administrator”. Keep the other settings and enter the name “Virtual
Classroom” for the room.
a) Open the course menu under your folder, SAPLS##. Choose the
training workshop## on which you have booked yourself. Right mouse
click on this course (not the coursetype, even though this would be
possible) and then Display. In the dialog box that appears, choose
curriculum instead of elements. Click on the pencil icon to switch to
change mode.
Under Overview, select the “Collaboration Room” infotype (scroll to
the bottom of the list) and click Create. In the next screen, click on
“Create Room”. With F4, choose “00000002” as the template profile
and enter owner HR270-## with role Administrator.
Enter “Virtual Classroom” as the description and confirm.
Leave the other settings the way they are.
Save your entries.
Task 3:
You are a teletutor who uses several different communication tools.
1. Log on to the portal again and open “your” room
a) You can click the collaboration tab of the SAP Portal directly and open
your room in the Overview.
2. Invite another course participant (your number + 1, for example) to become
a member of your room.
a) Click Member Administration. Enter HR270 in the search field and
click “Find”. Select a user of your choice (HR270-(##+1)) and click
the “>” icon. Choose “OK” to confirm.
b) Assign role “Member” to the new room member by setting the field
in the appropriate column. Save your entries.
Continued on next page
206 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 215/394
HR270 Lesson: Collaboration in SAP LS Training Management
3. Create a subfolder “HR270”.
a) Click Documents and Links in the left navigation frame.
b) Click the “context menu” next to “Documents ” → New→ Folder.
c) Enter HR270 as the name and a description of your choice. Then
“save” your entries.
4. Copy a file of your choice from your desktop (simply create a Word or
PowerPoint document and save it there) to the folder and add a personal
remark.
a) Click the link to your folder HR270 (created above).
b) Click the “context menu” next to “HR270 ” → New→ Upload.
c) Click “Browse” to select your file.
d) Enter a name and a comment, then click “Upload” to confirm.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 207
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 216/394
Unit 7: Collaboration HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• List the steps in SAP LS Training Management that can or need to be used
in order to link collaboration rooms directly with the courses offered in the
SAP Learning Portal.
• Set up a new collaboration room automatically when you configure a course,
making all the course participants members of the room
208 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 217/394
HR270 Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Explain how the collaboration rooms in the SAP Enterprise Portal can be
and are important for the SAP Learning Solution
• List the collaboration options that SAP Netweaver could provide for the SAP
Learning Portal too.
• Explain how collaboration in the SAP Enterprise Portal is linked directly
with the SAP Learning Portal
• List the steps in SAP LS Training Management that can or need to be used
in order to link collaboration rooms directly with the courses offered in the
SAP Learning Portal.
• Set up a new collaboration room automatically when you configure a course,
making all the course participants members of the room
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 209
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 218/394
Unit Summary HR270
210 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 219/394
Unit 8 SAP LS Authoring Environment –
Basics
Unit Overview
You will receive an overview of the basics of content creation, as well as thecomponents of the Authoring Environment in the SAP Learning Solution.
You will learn about the various options available for configuring the SAP LS
Authoring Environment.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Name the benefits and most important properties of SCORM
• Explain how the SAP-specific attributes relate to the various learning
strategies
• Describe the main components of the Authoring Environment in the SAP
Learning Solution
• Describe the structure of the user interface for the SAP Authoring
Environment
• Sketch the basic layout of the learning structure
• Edit learning nets in the user interface for the SAP Authoring Environment
by drag&drop and other methods
• Name the tasks of the most important fields of the dialog area
• Carry out the general, online, and relationship configuration
• Configure the repository and Content Player settings
Unit Contents
Lesson: Creating Content with the SAP Authoring Environment –Basics............................................................................. 213
Lesson: Structure of the Authoring Environment ...........................223Lesson: User Interface for the SAP Authoring Environment .. . . . .. . .. . . . .228
Lesson: Configuration. .... ... .... ... .... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... .... .... ..235
Procedure: Specify Associations for Editing .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 241Procedure: Specify Associations for Displaying Data .................244
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 211
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 220/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Exercise 8: First Steps in the SAP Authoring Environment. . .. . .. . . . .249
212 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 221/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Content with the SAP Authoring Environment – Basics
Lesson: Creating Content with the SAP Authoring
Environment – Basics
Lesson Overview
In this section, you will learn the theoretical foundations of structuring Web
Based Training. You need to understand the theory in order to work with the
SAP Authoring Environment. This involves SCORM as the general, recognized
standard for learning software, as well as the specific foundations for the
application of learning strategies.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Name the benefits and most important properties of SCORM
• Explain how the SAP-specific attributes relate to the various learning
strategies
Business Example
You are a content author. Before you begin implementing the actual objects, you
want to find out which standards you need to follow and how you can cater to the
varied, individual learning strategies of your target audience.
SCORM and the SAP Learning Solution
Figure 112: Requirements of Content
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 213
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 222/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Modern electronic learning material has to meet several specific requirements
independently of the SAP Learning Solution. The motivation is clear: If this
content is to be deployable in different Learning Management Systems, or if certain contents and modules are to be implemented in other networks, then
content providers and LMS vendors have to agree on a common standard.
Several past initiatives have contributed to the current situation; we will only
discuss them briefly here:
• AICC - www.aicc.org: Although the CBT committee was originally founded
by the aviation sector to standardize training material for airplane builders
and customers, its standard framework can be used by a wide range of
industries.
• IMS - www.imsproject.org: IMS Global Learning Consortium, Inc. (IMS)
supports and develops open specifications, for example, for metadata or guidelines for tests. These specifications are intended to support typical
learning activities such as localization and use of learning content, tracking
and reporting learning progress, and data exchange between different
administrative systems. IMS has two key goals:
1. Defining the technical specifications for interoperability of applications
and services in a distributed learning framework
2. Establishing IMS specifications in products and services around the
world
IMS strives to promote widespread acceptance of its specifications and
permit collaboration between a number of authors, even in distributedlearning environments with different content. IMS is a global association that
counts educational institutions, commercial entities, and public organizations
amongst its members. IMS metadata was recently integrated in the IEEE
and ISO standardization processes.
• SCORM - www.adlnet.org: The Sharable Content Object Reference
Model (SCORM) builds on the work of AICC, IMS, and others to create
a standardized "content model". These specifications enable the reuse of
WBT content, even when multiple learning environments and products are
involved. SCORM currently consists of three main sections: eXtensible
Markup Language (XML)-based specifications to represent the course
structures (enabling courses to be moved from one server to another), aset of specifications for the runtime environment – including an API and a
content-LMS data model – and a specification for recording metadata for
courses, content, and pure media elements.
214 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 223/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Content with the SAP Authoring Environment – Basics
Figure 113: SCORM Course Structure Model
The SAP Learning Solution is SCORM compliant. How does SCORM
subdivide learning content to make it "universally" usable and recognizable? The
starting point is media data in its raw form – for example, an HTML page with
two images and a link to a Shockwave animation. This data – called "assets" –
is grouped together to form self-contained learning units that cannot contain any
links to other assets outside the specific Sharable Content Object (SCO). SCOs
form the smallest exchangable unit of the electronic learning objects. They can begrouped together to form blocks for better structuring, These blocks could then be
used as units of a complete WBT (content).
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 215
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 224/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Figure 114: Comparison of Structures – SAP LS and SCORM
The subdivisions in the above diagram exist in similar form in the Authoring
Environment of the SAP Learning Solution. You may have noticed that the
SAP Learning Solution makes it possible to insert an additional level between
assets and SCOs. In addition to improved structuring for the content authors,
this option makes it possible to offer learning content that adapts to the users'
learning strategies.
Learning Strategies
Learners do not all learn the same way – or at least, not in the way that would
be the most effective for them. Some learners work better with exercises, for
example, while others can relate better to examples. Compared to conventional
learning methods, e-learning has the advantage of adaptivity, so that content can
be presented in a way that suits a learner's individual preferences.
216 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 225/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Content with the SAP Authoring Environment – Basics
Figure 115: Learning Strategies
The SAP Learning Solution has a special feature here, the result of the L3
research project. (The L³ project “Lifelong Learning as a Basic Requirement”
ran from 01.01.1999 to 12.31.2002 under the leadership of the Campus-Based
Engineering Center (CEC) Karlsruhe, SAP AG's European research center. (A
total of approximately EUR 20.5 million was invested in the L³ project.) Learning
elements can be defined or linked with specific metadata in the SAP LS AuthoringEnvironment. The SAP LS Content Player then selects the available learning units
based on this metadata, and presents them to learners in a selection and sequence
that corresponds in the best possible way with their individual learning strategies.
Generally, learners work through the individual learning objects of a WBT in a
specific sequence, by clicking the “Continue” button.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 217
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 226/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Figure 116: Static Learning Path
Of course, content authors in the SAP Learning Solution can also specify
relationships ("appears in") to determine specific sequences, so that these
correspond to the typically linear learning path.
Figure 117: Dynamic Learning Paths
Content authors can also provide (the Content Player) a certain amount of leeway
with other relationships and attributes, so that the presentation can be adapted to
the individual learner's needs.
218 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 227/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Content with the SAP Authoring Environment – Basics
This feature – composing learning paths dynamically according to the attributes
of the instructional elements – sets the SAP Learning Solution apart from the
competition. This future-oriented option will play an increasingly important rolewhen an increasing amount of potentially alternative learning content becomes
available.
Although this goes largely unnoticed by the learner, a learning strategy actually
consists of two strategies: micro strategy and macro strategy. Accordingly, the
structures of the learning contents are differentiated by micro structures and
macro structures.
Figure 118: Macro Strategy
The macro structure of a learning net is described by the relationships between
the individual learning objects that comprise it. These relationships are defined by
the content author in the SAP LS Authoring Environment. Most of them are listed
in the diagram above. The two major macro strategies:
• Deductive (top down)
• Inductive (bottom up)
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 219
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 228/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Figure 119: Micro Strategy
While the macro strategy determines the selection and sequence of the learning
objects, the micro strategy decides which instructional elements are presented to
the learner, as well as their sequence within the individual learning objects.
Figure 120: Preferences Do Not Imply Excluding Other Types...
If a learner prefers an "example-oriented" learning strategy, for example, this does
not mean that the learner only sees examples. Instead, the selection and sequence
of the instructional elements within the learning objects focus on example-oriented
objects.
The Content Player makes these decisions based on the knowledge types that the
author has assigned to the individual instructional elements.
220 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 229/394
HR270 Lesson: Creating Content with the SAP Authoring Environment – Basics
Figure 121: Dynamic Learning Path Determination
The crux is therefore the Content Player algorithm, which adapts the content
presentation to the learner's selected learning strategy based on the relationships
between the learning objects and knowledge types in the instructional elements.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 221
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 230/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Name the benefits and most important properties of SCORM
• Explain how the SAP-specific attributes relate to the various learning
strategies
222 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 231/394
HR270 Lesson: Structure of the Authoring Environment
Lesson: Structure of the Authoring Environment
Lesson Overview
You will receive an initial overview of the Authoring Environment in the SAP
Learning Solution – in particular, of its different components and features.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe the main components of the Authoring Environment in the SAP
Learning Solution
Business Example
You are in charge of a pilot project in your training department and want to find
out about software for converting your content into a WBT that can be played in a
SCORM-compliant Learning Management System. In the process, you also want
to take a look at the big picture and examine other options for didactic design.
The Authoring Environment
Figure 122: The Authoring Environment in the Architecture of the SAP LS
The Authoring Environment combines several powerful tools that authors can use
to structure, edit, and test course content.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 223
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 232/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
The following components support authors with the structuring of XML-based
content:
• Structure Editor to structure course content and tests
• Test Editor to edit tests and support the issuing of certificates
• Integrated, locally installed Content Player to test the contents
• Repository Explorer to communicate between the individual authors' local
repositories and the “master repository”, which contains the objects that all
authors can use for their learning objects
In addition, external authoring tools for editing the content of the electronic
training material can be integrated seamlessly.
Features of the SAP Authoring EnvironmentThe Authoring Environment component of the SAP Learning Solution supports
you in the following processes:
• You can format and structure new learning content.
• You can integrate learning content from external providers.
• When you develop learning materials, you are given methodical support
in the form of appropriate templates (knowledge categories) and default
relationships to help structure the learning content.
• You can create learning objects compliant with the internationally recognized
SCORM standard Web-based learning content model.
• You can reuse learning objects independently of one another, that is, switch
between xml-based authoring tools and edit them, since learning objects are
self-contained units according to SCORM.
• You can provide learners with learning content for which learning paths are
dynamically generated (Content Player).
• You can import SCORM-compliant courses. These courses are executable
and can be edited, for example, by specifying relationships and attributes
for using learning strategies.
224 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 233/394
HR270 Lesson: Structure of the Authoring Environment
Technical Essentials of the Authoring Environment
Figure 123: The Architecture of the Authoring Environment
The Authoring Environment is a Java application. It can be used locally on a PC
offline or online with direct data exchange with the Publisher Database in SAP R/3
and the central content repository [Content Management or Web DAV Server].
In the authoring process of creating courses, the author first creates content and
stores it in files in a local repository. The local repository of the Authoring
Environment must be configured accordingly.
The learning nets, learning objects, and instructional elements contain a metadatafile containing such details as status, author, GUID, and creation date. Courses
can be changed locally until they are checked into the master repository. Check-in
requires an online connection to the Content Management System or WebDAV
Server [HTTP].
When content is released for reuse, an entry is made in the Publisher Database
in SAP R/3 by means of an RFC. The user interface for the master repository is
provided by the Repository Explorer.
A WebDAV-compliant CMS, such as the Content Management System in the SAP
Portal, is required to store and manage content. Content Management also stores
data on the multiple attributes of the content files, which can be used to search for
content [TREX].
Learning objectives catalog
Learning objects can be linked with learning objectives, so the learning objective
can be considered achieved when the learner has processed the corresponding
objects. From a technical perspective, this means a learner does not have to
achieve the same, redundant learning objectives in different learning nets when
the objects are assigned to the same learning objective in a centralized catalog.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 225
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 234/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
To create and maintain these relationships, the Authoring Environment regularly
synchronizes the learning objectives catalog with the central learning objectives
catalog. In the opposite direction, new, locally defined learning objectives areadded to the central catalog, where they are available to other authors.
226 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 235/394
HR270 Lesson: Structure of the Authoring Environment
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Describe the main components of the Authoring Environment in the SAP
Learning Solution
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 227
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 236/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Lesson: User Interface for the SAP Authoring
Environment
Lesson Overview
You will be given an introduction to the user interface for the SAP Authoring
Environment.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Describe the structure of the user interface for the SAP Authoring
Environment• Sketch the basic layout of the learning structure
• Edit learning nets in the user interface for the SAP Authoring Environment
by drag&drop and other methods
• Name the tasks of the most important fields of the dialog area
Business Example
You are a course author/instructional designer responsible for creating e-learning
units that can be put together to form courses. To do this, you are now acquainting
yourself with the necessary software.
228 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 237/394
HR270 Lesson: User Interface for the SAP Authoring Environment
User Interface: Structure
Figure 124: The Authoring Environment Interface
The screen layout of the Authoring Environment is composed of the following
areas:
• Learning Net Overview
• Workspace
• Dialog Area
• Message Display
• Learning Strategy Preview
• Status Line
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 229
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 238/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Learning Net Overview
Figure 125: Learning Net Overview
In the learning net overview, you can create learning nets, learning objects, and
instructional elements. These units are displayed in the sequence in which they
were created. A reference file is automatically created for each learning net and
learning object. Units of the same kind are displayed on the same level.
The connections between learning objects and instructional elements arerepresented by relationships.
Caution: No hierarchies are displayed. The tree structure in the learning
net overview does not reflect the course structure.
Learning net references, learning object references, and instructional elements
are color coded.
Figure 126: Color Coding in the Learning Net Overview
230 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 239/394
HR270 Lesson: User Interface for the SAP Authoring Environment
The buttons on the right side of the learning net overview enable you to move the
references around within a learning net and the instructional elements within
a learning object.
Hint: This is not a copy function.
You are simply changing the sequence of references and instructional elements.
This sequence is displayed in the Content Player as well if you do not create any
other relationships between the units.
If you do create relationships, the instructional elements in Content Player are
displayed according to the relationships and the sequence in the learning net
overview is ignored.
You can also move references and instructional elements using the Drag&Dropfunction.
Workspace
Figure 127: Workspace
The workspace (or work area) offers an alternative way of creating andediting learning nets, learning objects, and instructional elements and their
interrelationships in a graphical layout.
Above the workspace, there is a type of tab page system.
Color-coded tab pages are generated for each learning net and learning object. The
indicators correspond to those in the learning net overview (see graphic above).
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 231
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 240/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Dialog Area
Figure 128: Dialog Area
In the dialog area, you edit learning nets, learning references, learning objects,
learning object references, and instructional elements, and store all of the relevant
data for them. Labelling renders the majority of fields self-explanatory.
Figure 129: Specifying LOM File for Learning Net
In addition, you can specify LOM files with metadata for learning nets, learning
references, learning objects, learning object references, and instructional elementson the “Extended” tab page. A typical example is the anticipated learning time for
a learning object. You can calculate the anticipated overall processing time for
learning nets from the total for the subordinate elements.
232 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 241/394
HR270 Lesson: User Interface for the SAP Authoring Environment
Message Display and Status Bar
Figure 130: Message Display and Status Bar
The “Message Display” area contains information messages, warnings, and
errors, as well as messages from the Repository Explorer about learning nets,
learning objects, their references, and instructional elements.
For each message, the display includes the message content (“short description”)
and the learning unit (“resource”) to which the message refers [for example,
learning net, learning object, or instructional element].
Hint: If you double-click the message, you can access the object to which
it refers in the learning net overview and edit it directly.
The status bar tells you the current status of the most important components of
the SAP Authoring Environment at a glance.
The status bar is divided into three parts. It displays the following status messages:
• Content Player
The system indicates whether the Content Player is running or has stopped.
• Learning Objectives Catalog
The system indicates whether the learning objectives catalog has been
synchronized or not [for example, if a learning objective was created offline].
• Online/Offline
The system indicates whether you are working online or offline.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 233
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 242/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Describe the structure of the user interface for the SAP Authoring
Environment
• Sketch the basic layout of the learning structure
• Edit learning nets in the user interface for the SAP Authoring Environment
by drag&drop and other methods
• Name the tasks of the most important fields of the dialog area
234 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 243/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Lesson: Configuration
Lesson Overview
You will learn how to configure the Authoring Environment from the configuration
menu.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Carry out the general, online, and relationship configuration
• Configure the repository and Content Player settings
Business Example
You are a course author/instructional designer responsible for creating e-learning
units that can be put together to form courses. Since authors use different tools
when creating content, they must be able to configure the Authoring Environment
to suit their individual needs.
You need to know how to configure your locally installed Authoring Environment
to best suit your working requirements.
Configuration of Working Environment
Figure 131: Configuration of the Authoring Environment
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 235
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 244/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
You generally configure the Authoring Environment the first time you start it. You
can make system settings under the following headings:
• General
• Online
• Relationships
• Repository
• Content Player
In the Authoring Environment, choose Tools→ Configuration.
General
Graphical Display
The options available for the “graphical display in the workspace” are:“grid”,
“directed” and “compact”.
Figure 132: Graphical Display
Hint: Where possible, you should use the display option “directed”
since this layout algorithm attempts to retain the arrow directions of therelationships.
Bear in mind that this display option requires more space than the
“compact” option.
You must restart the learning net for the changed display options to take effect.
236 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 245/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Look and Feel
The options available for the look and feel of the interface are: “CDE / Motif”,
“Frog”, “Metal”, and “Windows”. This decision depends entirely on the author's
personal preferences. There are no functional differences between the different
skins.
Figure 133: Interface Layout 1
Figure 134: Interface Layout 2
You also have to restart the learning net for your changes to take effect.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 237
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 246/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
The following indicators are set by default:
• Show Relationship Names
The relationship names are displayed beside the arrows in the graphical
workspace.
• Activate Graphics on Opening
The system branches directly to a referenced learning net on opening.
• Use Wizard for Creating New Instructional Elements
Deselect this indicator only if you do not want to use the wizard when
creating instructional elements without templates.
Message Types DisplayedUnder “Message Types Displayed”, you can display “information” and “warning
messages”. Deselect the indicator to hide some message types.
In the message display, you must then choose “Refresh” to delete the messages
from the display. Only error messages are displayed from then on.
To display all message types, select the relevant indicator.
Refresh Graphic Automatically if...
Under “Refresh Graphic Automatically if...” there are several options for
displaying objects in the graphical workspace.
Figure 135: “Refresh Graphic Automatically if:” in Configuration
The more automatic refresh options you select, the more up-to-date the graphic
will be. The fewer actions you select, the more coherent the display.
Show Hidden Dialogs
You can suppress various messages by selecting the indicator “Do not display this
message again” in the Message dialog box. No further messages are displayed
about this object. To reactivate the display, select the indicator Show Hidden
Dialogs.
238 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 247/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Accordingly, this indicator enables you to reactivate the display of messages that
have been hidden. Example:
Save the learning net MS Outlook . The message output is: The following learning
net/object was saved: MS Outlook.
Online
Figure 136: “Online” in the Authoring Environment
Start Online
If you select the indicator “Start Online”, when the Authoring Environment is
launched, a connection is automatically set up to the SAP back end system and
the master repository.
Automatically Synchronize Objectives Catalog
If you select the “Automatically Synchronize Objectives Catalog” indicator, the
learning objectives catalog is synchronized automatically when the connection
to the SAP back end system is set up using File→ Offline or in the Repository
Explorer using “Connect”.
Caution: Bear in mind that this process may take some time to complete.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 239
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 248/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Associations
Figure 137: Associations
Here you specify associations to be used for editing and displaying content files
and source files.
To keep the familiar system associations as default value, set the “Use System
Associations for Non-Associated Extensions” indicator.
If this indicator is selected, the system associations that are stored by the system as
file extensions for programs are applied.
240 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 249/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Specify Associations for Editing
1. Use
You use this function to specify what system associations you want to use for
editing media objects.
1. Choose Tools→ Configuration→ Associations. The Configuration
dialog box appears.
In the top half of the dialog box, you make settings relating to associations
used for editing files.
2. Choose “New”.
The “Create New Association” dialog box appears.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 241
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 250/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Figure 138: Create New Association for Editing Data
• Enter a name of your choice.• Select one of the options:
– Use system associations at startup / start using system
associations
Select this option if you want to use the application registered in
the Windows Explorer for this file extension.
– Application
Select this option if you want to specify an application yourself.
• Choose Find Application to invoke a search for the root file of the
application. Then choose Select .
• Enter the file extension in the Extension field and choose Add .
• Set the This editor can be used to create tests indicator if the application
is suitable for creating tests.
• The indicator This editor can be used to create instructional elements is
set by default. If necessary, deselect it.
• This editor has a different source and read-only format
Select this indicator if the application offers different formats for
editing and displaying files.
If you select MS Word as the application, the source format .docand the display format .html are available.
• Select one of the options:
– Create empty file if no file exists
Select this indicator if you want a new empty file automatically
created at editor startup if no file already exists.
– Copy of file
Select this option if you want to use a specific template for the
files [via Find File].
• Choose OK .
3. You return to the Configuration dialog box.
4. Choose OK .
5. Repeat this procedure until you have specified all the system associations
you require.
Result
Continued on next page
242 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 251/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
You have specified the system associations for editing tests and media
objects.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 243
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 252/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Specify Associations for Displaying Data
1. Use
You use this function to specify what system associations you want to use
for displaying media objects.
2. Choose Tools→ Configuration→ Associations. The Configuration
dialog box appears. In the top half of the dialog box, you make settings
relating to associations used for displaying files.
2. Choose New.
The Create New Association dialog box appears.
Continued on next page
244 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 253/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Figure 139: Create New Association for Displaying Data
• Enter a name of your choice.
• Select one of the options:
– Use system associations at startup
Select this option if you want to use the application registered in
the Windows Explorer for this file extension.
– Application
Select this option if you want to specify an application yourself.
• Choose Find Application to invoke a search for the root file of the
application. Then choose Select .
• Enter the file extension in the Extension field and choose Add .
• Select the option Access Files via Content Player if you want content to
be loaded from the Content Player rather than from the file system.
• Choose OK.
3. The Configuration dialog box appears.
4. Choose OK .
5. Repeat this procedure until you have specified all the system associations
you require.
Result
You have specified the system associations for displaying media objects.
Repository
On the tab page “Repository”, you can configure the local repository, the master
repository, and the search engine.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 245
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 254/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
246 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 255/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Figure 140: Repositories
• Local Repository
The local repository is the directory structure on your local hard drive or on a
server where all locally created objects (learning nets, learning objects and
instructional elements) are stored. If necessary, you can select a different
“root folder” for the local repository. Note that no objects may be open in the
Authoring Environment at this point.
• Master Repository
The master repository is the central storage location for all of the learning
nets, learning objects and media objects accessible to authors. The Server
URL of the master repository is displayed. This parameter is set in
Customizing for the SAP Learning Solution HR Extension Set .
• Search Engine
Use of a search engine is optional. Using a search engine enables you to
search for objects you have created and stored in the master repository. (SAP
Search Engine: TREX – Text Retrieval and Information Extraction).
The following parameters are required for installation of the search engine:
– Server URL of the HTTP Server where the search engine is located
– Name of the search index that is exclusively available to the SAP
Learning Solution
– URL prefix for communication between the Content ManagementSystem and the master repository
These parameter are also set in Customizing for the SAP Learning
Solution HR Extension Set .
• Use Proxy for HTTP Connections
Here you specify the Server URL for the proxy server you use to access the
master repository if this is located before a firewall.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 247
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 256/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
Content Player
Figure 141: Content Player
The Content Player in the SAP Learning Solution is the tool used for playing
time-independent courses, such as Web-based Training [WBT].
Auto Start Content Player at Editor Startup
The indicator “Auto Start Content Player at Editor Startup” is set by default.
As a result, the Content Player is automatically started when the Authoring
Environment is started.
Strategy Selection: Macro Strategy and Micro Strategy
The “macro strategy” and “micro strategy” you set here are applied when the
Content Player plays a learning net or learning object. The micro strategies
offered for selection depend on the macro strategy you select. Your selection
here basically corresponds to the setting made by the user for his or her learning
account in the Learning Portal.
Show Strategy Selection at Browser Start
The indicator “Display Strategy Selection at Browser Start” is set by default.
When you launch the Content Player , the predefined learning strategy selection is
displayed in a dialog box. You can change it here if necessary.Use Knowledge Type for Instructional Element Display
You select the indicator “Use Knowledge Type for Instructional Element Display”
if you want the Content Player to show the knowledge type of an instructional
element instead of its name in the table of contents.
248 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 257/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Exercise 8: First Steps in the SAP
Authoring EnvironmentExercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Unpack a learning net in the local repository and trace the learning strategies
based on knowledge types
Business Example
You are a content author and want to take your first steps in the SAP Authoring
Environment, using a sample course.
Task 1:
This exercise covers the first steps for working with the SAP Authoring
Environment. Work through the following steps sequentially.
Hint: You carry out this exercise in your locally installed SAP Authoring
Environment (Start → Programs→ SAP Learning Solution→ Authoring
Tool ) in the ERP2005 back end of the IDES Training System, “Learning
Solution Back End” and in the IDES Learning Portal. “##” stands for your
user number in the exercises. The logon data for the Learning Portal and
the SAP ERP2005 back end are the same as in the previous exercises.
Caution: Be sure to initialize the system before you launch the actual
Authoring Environment under Windows. The initialization path is
practically the same as the one for the Authoring Environment. Follow
the instructions there. This initialization is only required for SAP course
HR270.
1. Start the Authoring Environment and enter the path to the local repository
named during initialization.
Hint: It may take a few minutes for it to start up.
2. Unpack package HR270_1 as a group of learning nets into a new folder,
“Teams”.
3. Open the learning net (the course) that you just unpacked (introduction).
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 249
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 258/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
4. Compare the data displayed in the learning net overview with the data in
your work area. What differences are there?
5. Open both learning objects
6. Change the subjects of the learning objects in the dialog area as desired (to
correspond to the names of the references).
7. Save all learning objects.
8. Open learning object “Teams”.
9. Compare the different instructional elements with one another from the point
of view of the knowledge types assigned.
10. Define instructional element “Welcome” as the “Start Node for Layout of
Graphical Display or Top Item ...” (“Extended” tab in the dialog area for
the element).
11. Choose “Refresh Graphic” and check the result.
Task 2:
Relationships and knowledge types. The use of relationships and knowledge types
influences the sequence in which instructional elements and learning objects in a
learning net are played in the Content Player.
1. Play the learning net in the Content Player. Select the strategy for playing
the learning net.
Macro strategy: Inductive
Micro strategy: Example-oriented
2. Navigate through the course using “Continue” and “Back”. Pay attention to
how you navigate through the course.
3. Exit the learning net and the Content Player by choosing “Log Off”
4. Start the Content Player again.
This time, select the strategy:
Macro strategy: Inductive
Micro strategy: Task-oriented
5. What difference do you notice from the micro strategy example you selected
previously?
6. Close all the open objects.
250 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 259/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Solution 8: First Steps in the SAP
Authoring EnvironmentTask 1:
This exercise covers the first steps for working with the SAP Authoring
Environment. Work through the following steps sequentially.
Hint: You carry out this exercise in your locally installed SAP Authoring
Environment (Start → Programs→ SAP Learning Solution→ Authoring
Tool ) in the ERP2005 back end of the IDES Training System, “Learning
Solution Back End” and in the IDES Learning Portal. “##” stands for your
user number in the exercises. The logon data for the Learning Portal andthe SAP ERP2005 back end are the same as in the previous exercises.
Caution: Be sure to initialize the system before you launch the actual
Authoring Environment under Windows. The initialization path is
practically the same as the one for the Authoring Environment. Follow
the instructions there. This initialization is only required for SAP course
HR270.
1. Start the Authoring Environment and enter the path to the local repository
named during initialization.
Hint: It may take a few minutes for it to start up.
a) Start → Programs→ SAP Learning Solution→ Authoring Environment
2. Unpack package HR270_1 as a group of learning nets into a new folder,
“Teams”.
a) Tools→ Packaging→ Unpack
b) Find HR270_1.lnp on the L drive and click Select to confirm.
c) Unpack Package.
Under “Select a Folder”, enter your own folder, Teams##, and select it.
d) Select the fourth option, “Groups of Learning Nets ...”, and click OK
to confirm.
e) The process is now complete. Click Close.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 251
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 260/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
3. Open the learning net (the course) that you just unpacked (introduction).
a) File→ Open→ Learning Net .
Double-click on Teams## and open the learning net.
4. Compare the data displayed in the learning net overview with the data in
your work area. What differences are there?
a) The learning net overview (top left) lists the instructional elements and
learning object references; the work area (top right) displays detailed
information such as knowledge types and it displays relationships
graphically.
5. Open both learning objects
a) Double-click the objects “Teams” and “Distributed Environment” one
after another. Each object appears in the dialog area (bottom left).
6. Change the subjects of the learning objects in the dialog area as desired (to
correspond to the names of the references).
a) Change the entry under “Subject”.
7. Save all learning objects.
a) File→ Save All . We recommend that you deactivate the permanent
display of confirmation messages by setting the relevant indicator.
8. Open learning object “Teams”.
a) Double-click on learning object “Teams” in the learning nets overview.
9. Compare the different instructional elements with one another from the point
of view of the knowledge types assigned.
a) The knowledge types of the instructional elements are indicated by the
first term in parenthesis, as you will see by comparing with the data
in the dialog area.
10. Define instructional element “Welcome” as the “Start Node for Layout of
Graphical Display or Top Item ...” (“Extended” tab in the dialog area for
the element).
a) Click the learning object and in the dialog area (bottom left) choose thetab page “Extended”. Activate field “Root node ...”.
11. Choose “Refresh Graphic” and check the result.
a) Icon or View→ Graphic→ Refresh.
Continued on next page
252 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 261/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Task 2:
Relationships and knowledge types. The use of relationships and knowledge types
influences the sequence in which instructional elements and learning objects in a
learning net are played in the Content Player.
1. Play the learning net in the Content Player. Select the strategy for playing
the learning net.
Macro strategy: Inductive
Micro strategy: Example-oriented
a) Tools→ Play Learning Net/Object
You are prompted to select a strategy. You select the listed attributes
and either keep or omit “Free Strategy Selection” under TM Strategy.
Confirm your selection by choosing "Confirm".
2. Navigate through the course using “Continue” and “Back”. Pay attention to
how you navigate through the course.
a) As in the exercises for the Learning Portal. From the user's perspective,
there is no difference between the local Content Player and the Content
Player that you start from the Learning Portal. Click “Table of
Contents” and regularly check your position in the course, based on the
processed (green checkmark) and current (yellow flag) steps.
3. Exit the learning net and the Content Player by choosing “Log Off”
a) “Log off” bottom left in the Content Player browser.
4. Start the Content Player again.
This time, select the strategy:
Macro strategy: Inductive
Micro strategy: Task-oriented
a) As above: Tools→ Play Learning Net/Object with “Task-oriented” as
the micro strategy.
b) Confirm your selection by choosing “Confirm”.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 253
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 262/394
Unit 8: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Basics HR270
5. What difference do you notice from the micro strategy example you selected
previously?
a) The sequence of the instructional elements has changed, particularly
the instructional element taken from the teams.
Hint: The objective of the exercise is to illustrate the potential
consequences of the attributes and relationships. The author,
who has direct control of the path in the AU interface, can
always dictate a certain sequence – for example, with “Before”.
Also select the various attributes, to show the differences
between the different display forms.
6. Close all the open objects.
a) File→ Close All.
254 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 263/394
HR270 Lesson: Configuration
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Carry out the general, online, and relationship configuration
• Configure the repository and Content Player settings
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 255
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 264/394
Unit Summary HR270
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Name the benefits and most important properties of SCORM
• Explain how the SAP-specific attributes relate to the various learning
strategies
• Describe the main components of the Authoring Environment in the SAP
Learning Solution
• Describe the structure of the user interface for the SAP Authoring
Environment
• Sketch the basic layout of the learning structure
• Edit learning nets in the user interface for the SAP Authoring Environment
by drag&drop and other methods
• Name the tasks of the most important fields of the dialog area
• Carry out the general, online, and relationship configuration
• Configure the repository and Content Player settings
256 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 265/394
Unit 9SAP LS Authoring Environment –
Content Editing
Unit Overview
You will acquire an overview of the functions and options contained in theAuthoring Environment of the SAP Learning Solution. You will learn how to
structure courses and create the various content types.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Create a learning net
• Maintain the attributes of a learning net
• Create a learning object
• Maintain the attributes of a learning object
• Create an instructional element
• Maintain the attributes of an instructional element
• Import existing content to the local repository
• Link existing content with an instructional element
• Create new content in the Authoring Environment
• Outline the advantages of using the Templates Manager
• Create a template for a learning net
• Create a template for a learning object
• Create a template for an instructional element• Create a template for a test
• Explain how the Learning Objectives Manager manages learning objectives
and synchronizes them with a centralized catalog
• Work with learning objectives (create, import, relate) within the SAP
Authoring Environment
• Distinguish between the different types of tests in the SAP Learning Solution
• Create different types of tests (multiple choice, gap test/fill-in, and so on)
• Prepare tests for learners: Provide with feedback, generate, play
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 257
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 266/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Unit Contents
Lesson: Designing a Learning Net ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .259Procedure: Creating a Learning Net .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .262
Procedure: Editing Learning Nets.. .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... ..263Procedure: Creating Learning Objects .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..267
Procedure: Maintaining Metadata.. .. ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ..269Procedure: Editing Learning Objects ....................................271
Procedure: Creating Instructional Elements ............................275
Procedure: Editing Instructional Elements .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..276Procedure: Creating Tests ................................................280Procedure: Editing Tests ..................................................281
Lesson: Integrating Your Own Content ......................................285Procedure: Importing Content to Local Repository . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .287
Procedure: Linking Content with an Instructional Element.. . .. . .. . . . .289Procedure: Creating New Content in the Authoring Environment . . .290
Lesson: Templates Manager .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. .. ... .. .292
Procedure: Learning Net Template ......................................294Procedure: Learning Object Template...................................295
Procedure: Instructional Element Template ............................296Procedure: Creating an Instructional Element Template Using the
Templates Manager ... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .297Procedure: Test Template .. ... .. ... ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... ... .. ... ..301
Procedure: Creating a Test Template Using the Templates
Manager .....................................................................302Lesson: Learning Objectives Manager.......................................305
Procedure: Automatic Synchronization. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .307Procedure: Creating Learning Objectives. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..308Procedure: Learning Objectives at the Level of Learning Nets ......310
Procedure: Learning Objectives in Placement Tests ..................312
Lesson: Test Editor ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... .... .... .... .... .... ... .... ... ..314Procedure: Creating a Placement Test or Final Test ..................317
Procedure: Creating an Online Test .....................................319Procedure: Creating the Test Structure... .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .320
Procedure: Creating Sections . ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ..321Procedure: Importing Learning Objectives from the Learning Net to the
Test ........ ........ ........ ........ ....... ........ ........ ....... ........ .....322
Procedure: Creating Item Groups ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .323Procedure: Creating Items ................................................324
Procedure: Inserting an Existing Item into a Test . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .326Procedure: Editing Items ..................................................327
Procedure: Generating Tests .... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... ... .. .. ... .. .328Exercise 9: Creating Web Based Courses with the SAP Authoring
Environment... ....... ........ ........ ....... ........ ........ ....... ........ .331
258 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 267/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Lesson Overview
You will learn how to create a learning net in the Authoring Environment. You
will learn about the objects in a learning net and the possible attributes you can
maintain, with the associated dependencies in setting up learning paths.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Create a learning net
• Maintain the attributes of a learning net
• Create a learning object
• Maintain the attributes of a learning object
• Create an instructional element
• Maintain the attributes of an instructional element
Business Example
You are a course author or instructional designer responsible for creating
web-based learning content, which can then be assigned to courses. You want to
develop new course content and have to create the appropriate structures to do so.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 259
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 268/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Setting Up a Learning Net Structure
Figure 142: Structure of a Learning Net
In the Authoring Environment, you structure knowledge in a learning net using
the “top-down” method.
This involves the following steps:
• You create learning nets and learning objects
• You create instructional elements
• You interlink instructional elements
• You interlink learning objects
You can create learning nets, learning objects, and instructional elements in the
learning net overview using either the context menus or the menu functions.
Hint: The graphical workspace of the context menus offers you a very
comfortable way of creating learning nets and learning objects.
The advantage of working in the workspace is that you can create
relationships between learning objects using easy Drag & Drop functions.
You create instructional elements in the learning net overview. You can use the
context menu for this too.
Caution: You should be aware that you as the author have a limited
influence on how learning content is presented to the learner.
260 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 269/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Based on the micro and macro strategies selected by the learner, the
Content Player uses algorithms to determine the sequence of learning
objects offered in the browser. This ensures that the learner can navigatethrough the course according to his or her personal learning style.
Creating a Learning Net
Definition
A learning net is a set of learning objects that can be used as course content.
Learning objects deal with a broad, self-contained topic. Learning objects are
linked with one another by means of relationships of a functional or didactic
nature [such as “hierarchical”, “before”, or “belongs to”].
StructureA typical learning net consists of learning objects, instructional elements, and tests.
Learning nets should not only contain instructional elements. Rather, learning nets
are intended to be “containers ”for learning objects. Complex learning nets can
contain a number of learning subnets in addition to learning objects.
A learning object, in turn, can contain multiple instructional elements. It treats a
smaller, self-contained subject or knowledge chunk.
Instructional elements are not subdivided any further. They represent “atoms”
of a learning net.
The “Create Learning Net” function lets you create both elementary and complexlearning nets.
You create a reference for a learning net that forms part of another learning net.
The purpose of a reference is to integrate the learning net in the “higher-level”
learning net.
Templates
To create a learning net using a template, you must first create the learning net
template. To create a template, open the learning net you want to use as a template
and choose File→ Save As Template. The name of the learning net is used initially
for the learning net template.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 261
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 270/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating a Learning Net
1. Procedure
To create a new learning net from scratch in the learning net overview:
A dialog box appears where you can select the folder in which you want to
store the learning net. You can use folders to store learning nets according to
specific structural criteria.
1. Choose New Learning Net .
2. Select a folder.
The Create New Learning Net dialog box appears.
3. Under Name, enter a short name for the learning net. This is thetechnical name of the learning net from the authoring perspective.
4. Select a content language for the learning net.
5. If necessary, you can click the relevant icon to switch storage folders.
6. Select a template for the learning net if you want to use one.
7. Choose OK .
8. Save your entries.
Result
• You have created a new learning net.
• The higher-level learning net is inserted into the learning net overview.
• In the case of learning subnets, a reference is also inserted.
262 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 271/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Editing Learning Nets
1. Use
When you create a learning net, the dialog box “Edit Learning Net” opens in
the dialog area. Here you can store all of the relevant information for the
learning net on tab pages.
Prerequisite
You must create a learning net before you can edit it.
Procedure
To edit a learning net:
2. Tab page “General”
1. Under Name, the name you assigned to the learning net is displayed. If
necessary, you can change this name.
2. Under Subject , you enter a long text for the learning net.
3. As source file, enter the editable content of an overview page. You
can edit this if required.
4. Under Overview, you can use the function Find Overview File to store
a different start page for your course, for example, one you created
yourself. If there is an overview file available, you can display or edit
this using the relevant icons. If you do not use an overview, the default
folder is automatically generated for the course.5. The root folder is the directory that contains all of the objects of a
learning net. You cannot edit this field since you may not change the
root folder.
Caution: When you want to transfer a file to the root folder,
you may only use the function Tools→ Import Resources
→ To Learning Net / Object to do so. Do not do this from
the Explorer. This is the only way to ensure that you can use
the files in the learning net.
3. Tab page “Extended”
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 263
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 272/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Figure 143: Tab page “Extended”
1. You cannot edit the learning time field. The time is determined
automatically for each learning object based on the learning time
defined for the media objects used.
2. The metadata (LOM) file contains the learning object metadata. The
file you reference should comply with the IEEE P1484.12 Standard.
The Authoring Environment does not check this, nor is it a prerequisite.
This step is optional.
3. Choose Find Placement Test to enter a placement test for the learning
net. You can edit this if required with the Edit Placement Test function.
This function opens the SAP Test Author of the Authoring Environment.
4. Choose Find Final Test to enter a final test for the learning net. You
can edit this if required with the Edit Final Test function. This function
opens the SAP Test Author of the Authoring Environment.5. You can display a preview of media objects in various file formats (such
as *.gif, *.jpg, or *.jpeg) by selecting the option Display Thumbnail
Image for Objects. This thumbnail image is displayed in the work area
instead of the name of the instructional element.
4. Tab Page “Learning Objectives”
Continued on next page
264 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 273/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Figure 144: Tab Page “Learning Objectives”
1. You can adopt existing learning objectives if a learning objectives
catalog is already available.
2. You can create new learning objectives. [Lesson; Learning Objectives
Manager].
3. Checkbox: Attainable If a learning objective is flagged as attainable, oncompletion of a learning net, it is awarded in the form of a qualification
to the learner account. Learning objectives not flagged as attainable
are only used for filtering and searching for learning objects. Changed
learning objectives are flagged with an asterisk by the system.
5. Tab page “Annotations”
Figure 145: Tab page “Annotations”
You can store a long text of your choice. The purpose of this free-text
field is to provide collaborating authors with additional information about
the learning object.
6. Tab page “Keywords”
Figure 146: Tab page “Keywords”
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 265
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 274/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
You can store keywords for the object search in the repository.
Hint: Use keywords taken from a commonly agreed controlled
vocabulary to ensure consistent use of terminology.
Result
You have stored all of the relevant information for the learning net in the system.
Creating Learning Objects
Definition
A learning object is the self-contained treatment of a subject aimed at imparting
and possibly testing [test] knowledge and skills. A learning object isself-contained, independent, and reusable.
Structure
A learning object consists of one or more instructional elements dealing with the
same subject. Thus, a learning object forms a kind of container for thematically
related instructional elements.
Learning objects and their interrelationships form a learning object net, generally
known as a learning net.
The structure and arrangement of learning objects form the macro structure of the
learning environment.
Hint: To make best use of the strategy concept, a learning object should
ideally contain several instructional elements with different knowledge
types.
Typical knowledge types are:
• Orientation
• Explanation
• Practical instruction/action
Instructional elements may be available in various forms, that is, in different
media representations [media types].
If a learning object is linked to a learning objective that is flagged as attainable, it
should, as a rule, also contain the instructional element Final Test .
266 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 275/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Creating Learning Objects
Figure 147: Structure of a Learning Object
1. To create a learning object :
Select the learning net and choose New Learning Object .
The Create New Learning Object dialog box appears.
Figure 148: Dialog box “Create New Learning Object”
2. Under Name, enter a short name for the learning object. This is the technical
name of the learning object from the authoring perspective.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 267
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 276/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
3. Select a content language for the learning object.
4. Use the search icon to search for the storage folder in which the object
should be stored.
You can use folders to store learning objects according to specific structural
criteria.
5. Select a template for the learning object if you want to use one. [See also
lesson: Template Manager]
6. Choose OK .
7. Save your entries.
Result
You have created a new learning object. In the learning net overview, the learning
object is inserted as an object and as a reference.
When you have created a learning object, the dialog box Edit Learning Object
opens in the dialog area.
Here you can store all of the relevant information for the learning object.
268 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 277/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Maintaining Metadata
Use
You can assign "metadata" to each learning net. This metadata describes the
learning net more accurately and, above all, can be evaluated when searching in
the master repository. With the full text search, authors can search through all the
learning nets and learning objects in the master repository for this metadata. This
is particularly helpful when it comes to using the content again at a later stage.
Prerequisites
You have to define the necessary metadata in Customizing.
Procedure
Figure 149: Edit metadata.
1. If a learning net has been selected, you can call the metadata editor byclicking on Edit Metadata. Here you can enter the values for the mandatory
values defined in Customizing for LSO 600.
Figure 150: Mandatory Fields
Metadata that has been flagged as mandatory in Customizing for the
SAP Learning Solution has to be added by the author in the Authoring
Environment. Either this, or it is metadata that is automatically determined
by the system as it had already been maintained or generated elsewhere. This
includes "language", "last changed on/by", "learning time", and "author", for
example. Of all this metadata, only the "author" can be changed at a later
stage. The author's user ID, which is proposed automatically, can also be
changed to a name.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 269
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 278/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Data that is not automatically assigned by the system must be maintained,
providing it has been flagged as "mandatory" in Customizing and therefore
appears in the "Mandatory Fields" tab page. If it is not maintained, an error message appears in the "Message" area of the Authoring Environment.
Figure 151: "Optional Fields"
2. You do not have to maintain the optional fields, however, they do improve
the quality of the description of the learning nets and learning objects, so
that you can identify and assign them more accurately using the full text
search at a later stage.
270 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 279/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Editing Learning Objects
1. Tab page “General”
Figure 152: Tab page “General”
1. Under Name, the name you assigned to the learning object is displayed.
If necessary, you can change this name.
The Content Player displays the name in the table of contents of the
course.
2. Under Subject , you enter a long text for the learning object.
3. The root folder is the directory that contains all of the objects of a
learning net. You cannot edit this field since you may not change the
root folder.
Caution: When you want to transfer a file to the root folder,
you may only use the function Tools→ Import Resources
→ To Learning Net / Object to do so. Do not do this from
the Explorer. This is the only way to ensure that you can use
the files in the learning net.
Result
You have stored all of the relevant information for the learning object in the system.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 271
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 280/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating Instructional Elements
Figure 153: Creating an Instructional Element
Definition
Within the Authoring Environment, you can flag a specific type of instructionalelements, to distinguish between instructional elements and test (elements)
subsequently.
Flagging Instructional Element and Test
Instructional element
An instructional element is the smallest didactical unit in a learning net that serves
to impart the content of a learning object.
It can be of varying didactic character (knowledge type) such as overview,
procedure, definition and so on and have different media types such as text,
image, or simulation.
Test (elements)
A test [element] is a special type of instructional element.
Tests are used only to check knowledge and skills.
You cannot store results or assign learning objectives, however.
272 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 281/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Test elements can be created for learning objects and learning nets. Depending on
the test type [placement test, final test, self-test, or exercise], tests are offered at
different times in the course [learning strategy].
Instructional Element – Structure
Instructional elements have the attributes knowledge type and media type.
The following knowledge types and their instances are available:
The following knowledge types and their instances are available:
Orientation Practical in-
struction/action
Explanation Reference
material
History Rule Why Explanation
Business Scenario Procedure What Explanation
Facts Checklist Definition
Summary Principle Example
Overview Strategy
The following media types and their instances are available:
Media Types and Their Occurrences
Presentation InteractiveText Simulation
Graphic Compound/Form
Image
Animation
Audio
Film/Video
An instructional element that is available in electronic form consists of read-only
content and editable content, if the format of the read-only content differs from theformat of the editable content.
The source file contains the content in editable format such as .ppt.
The media object contains the content in read-only format, such as .html.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 273
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 282/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Test – Structure
There are various test types, which can influence the course process flow,
depending on the results:
• Placement tests
Checking existing knowledge:
A placement test is always offered prior to taking a learning net or learning
object. As soon as a placement test has been taken, it is considered to have
been completed. If the participant passes a placement test, the learning net or
object that contains the test is skipped. Failing a placement test has no effect
on the course completion process.
• Self-assessment tests
Checking one’s own existing knowledge:
As soon as a self-assessment test has been taken, it is considered to have
been completed regardless of the test result. Passing or failing such tests
has no effect on the course process.
• Exercises
Checking the learning content to be imparted:
Exercises are considered to have been completed only when they have been
passed. In other words, the participant cannot navigate further until he or she
has successfully passed the exercise.
• Final tests
Testing knowledge acquired on completion of a course:
A final test is always offered at the end of a learning net or learning object. If
the participant does not pass the final test, the learning net or learning object
is reset to the status of not completed.
In this case, the participant must complete the learning net or learning object
again.
If the participant passes the test, the whole learning net or learning object is
considered to have been completed.
274 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 283/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Creating Instructional Elements
1. Use
There are two ways to create an instructional element: with or without
a template.
Prerequisite
To create an instructional element using a template, you must first create the
instructional element template. To do this, open the instructional element
you want to use as a template and choose File→ Save As Template.
Procedure
2. Right click the required learning object or learning net. Choose New Element
→ Instructional Element . The Create New Instructional Element dialog
box appears.
Figure 154: Creating Instructional Elements
3. Enter a name for the learning objective in the subject field.
4. Select an instructional element template where necessary.
5. Transfer your entries by choosing OK .
6. Save your entries.
Result
You have created a new instructional element (possibly using an instructional
element template) and inserted it in the learning net overview or in the graphic inthe relevant position.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 275
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 284/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Editing Instructional Elements
1. Use
When you have created an instructional element, the dialog box Edit
Instructional Element opens in the dialog area:
Here you can store all of the relevant information for the instructional
element.
2. Tab page “General”
Figure 155: Edit Instructional Element - Tab page “General”
1. The knowledge type specifies the type of content you want to store.
2. The media type specifies how the content of the instructional element is
presented.
3. Under Name, the system displays the name under which the
instructional element was created.
4. Under Source, you enter the content of the instructional element in
editable format.
5. Under Content , you enter the reference to the content in read-only
format. This could be any content that can be displayed in the browser
such as an HTML page, a text, a graphic, or an audio/video file.
Hint: For example, if the instructional element represents an image,
you can display a preview of it using the function Display media
object .
3. Tab page “Extended”
Continued on next page
276 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 285/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Figure 156: Edit Instructional Element - Tab page “Extended”
1. Under Learning Time, you enter the expected completion time for themedia object used.
2. The metadata (LOM) file contains the learning object metadata
(optional entry). The file you reference should comply with the IEEE
P1484.12 Standard. The Authoring Environment does not check this,
nor is it a prerequisite.
3. Under Thumbnail , you specify the thumbnail image for an instructional
element.
Caution: This thumbnail image is displayed in the work area
if you selected Display Thumbnail Image for Objects for the
object in question.
4. To specify an object as root node for the graphical display, select the
indicator Start Node for Layout of Graphical Display or Top Item ....
Hint: Note that this option only applies to the graphical
overview of the learning net in the work area of the Authoring
Environment.
5. The same notes and keywords apply as in the previous procedures.
Result
Here you can store all of the relevant information for the instructional element.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 277
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 286/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Testing in the SAP Authoring Environment
Figure 157: Testing in the Authoring Environment
“Testing” is, of course, a major part of many blended learning scenarios.
Moreover, online testing can reduce administrative significantly compared to
conventional “paper & pencil” tests of existing knowledge. Unfortunately, the
current SCO standard and test SCOs still allow for many liberties. While they
cannot be discussed fully at this juncture, the practical result is that practically,an LMS can primarily grade SCOs as tests for which he or she has defined the
corresponding (optional) parameters him/herself. Accordingly, the SAP LS
Authoring Environment has its own Test Editor.
278 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 287/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Figure 158: Test Types
The Test Author of the SAP Learning Solution is a tool you use to create tests and
online tests. Authors, instructional designers, trainers and course owners can
design and create tests with the help of the functions in the test environment.
The differentiated results storage option allows tracking of learning progress.
Evaluations and appraisals enable authors to modify tests to suit the needs of the
test participants and to measure course success.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 279
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 288/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating Tests
1. Use
There are two ways to create a test: with or without a template.
Prerequisite
To create a test using a template, you should have already created a test
template. To do this, select the test and choose File→ Save As Template
→ Test .
[See also lesson: Template Manager]
2. Procedure
Right click the required learning object or learning net. Choose New Element → Test .
The Create New Test dialog box appears.
Figure 159: Creating a New Test
3. Enter a name for the test in the subject field.
4. Select a test template where necessary.
5. Transfer your entries by choosing OK .
6. Save your entries.
Result
A new test has been created, if necessary by using a test template, and is inserted
in the learning net overview or in the graphic in the relevant position.
280 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 289/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
Editing Tests
1. Use
When you have created a test, the dialog box Edit Test opens in the dialog
area. Here you can store all of the relevant information for the test.
2. Tab page “General”
Figure 160: Edit Test - Tab page “General”
1. Under Test Type, you can choose between placement test, exercise,
self-assessment test, and final test to indicate the purpose of the test.
2. Under Name, the name you assigned to the test is displayed.
3. Under Source, you enter the content of the test in editable format.
4. Under Content , you enter the reference to the content in read-only
format.
3. Tab page “Extended”
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 281
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 290/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Figure 161: Edit Test - Tab page “Extended”
1. Under Learning Time, you enter the expected completion time for the
media object used.
2. The metadata (LOM) file contains the learning object metadata
(optional entry). The file you reference should comply with the IEEE
P1484.12 Standard. The Authoring Environment does not check this,
nor is it a prerequisite.
3. Under Thumbnail you specify the thumbnail image for a test. This
thumbnail image is displayed in the work area if you selected Display
Thumbnail Image for Objects for the object in question.
4. To specify an object as root node for the graphical display, select the
indicator Start Node for Layout of Graphical Display or Top Item ....
Hint: Note that this option only applies to the graphical
overview of the learning net in the workspace of the Authoring
Environment.
4. Tab page “Annotations”
Figure 162: Edit Test - "Annotations" Tab Page
Continued on next page
282 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 291/394
HR270 Lesson: Designing a Learning Net
You can store a long text of your choice. The purpose of this free-text
field is to provide collaborating authors with additional information about
the learning object.
5. Tab page “Keywords”
Figure 163: Edit Test - Tab page “Keywords”
You can store keywords for the search for instructional elements in the
repository.
Hint: Use keywords taken from a commonly agreed controlled
vocabulary to ensure consistent use of terminology.
Result
Here you can store all of the relevant information for the test.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 283
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 292/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Create a learning net
• Maintain the attributes of a learning net
• Create a learning object
• Maintain the attributes of a learning object
• Create an instructional element
• Maintain the attributes of an instructional element
284 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 293/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Your Own Content
Lesson: Integrating Your Own Content
Lesson Overview
You will learn how to assign (instructional) content to instructional elements. In
particular, you will find out about the content conversion options that enable you
to make external content available in the SAP Authoring Environment.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Import existing content to the local repository
• Link existing content with an instructional element
• Create new content in the Authoring Environment
Business Example
You are a course author or instructional designer responsible for creating content,
which can then be assigned to courses. Mainly, this involves linking the actual
content of your course, which may be available in widespread file formats (such as
Word, for example), with the learning objects in the structure of your course. Of
course, you want to be able to optimize the individual files in future, as necessary,
and maybe even use these changes to update the course automatically.
Content
The files containing the actual content – texts, images, tables, animations, and so
on – are referred to as “media objects” in the SAP Authoring Environment. The
handling of these media objects is described in the procedures below.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 285
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 294/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Figure 164: Importing Content to Local Repository
To link local content with your learning nets and learning objects, it has to be
published in the SAP Authoring Environment. Of course, it also has to be
physically present in the local repository to become part of the learning nets.
286 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 295/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Your Own Content
Importing Content to Local Repository
1. There are two ways of importing existing content into the local repository:
1. You can copy a non-reusable file (such as a *.jpg file) that you want
to have available in a learning net or object to the local repository and
automatically to the root directory of this object.
Hint: Files in the root directory of a learning net can only be
used in this specific learning net or object.
2. You can copy files as reusable media objects to the local repository.
PrerequisiteYou must first open the learning net into whose root directory you want
to copy the file.
2. Importing a Resource to a Learning Net/Learning Object
1. Open the learning net into whose root directory you want to copy files.
2. Choose Tools→ Import Resources→ To Learning Net / Object . The
dialog box Import Resources into Learning Net / Object appears.
3. Select the files you want to transfer.
4. Choose Import.
Result
The files are now stored in the root directory of the learning net and can
be used in this learning net.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 287
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 296/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
3. Importing Resource as Reusable Media Object
1. Choose Tools→ Import Resources→ As Reusable Media Object .
2. The dialog box Copy Media Object to Repository appears.
3. Select the files you want to transfer.
4. Choose Import .
The Create New Reusable Object dialog box appears.
5. Select an object type [learning net or learning object, single or
compound media object (reusable), group of learning nets and learning
objects].
• When you select the object type learning net/object , all of the
files you select are stored in exactly one new learning net/object.
The anchor file must point to the learning net/object file.
• When you select the object type single media object , exactly
one of the selected files is imported. It is created as a reusable
media object.
• When you select the object type compound media object , all of
the selected files are imported. They are created as a reusable
media object. The anchor file must point to the access file of
the compound resource.
• When you select the object type group of learning nets/objects, a
search is made of the selected files for (reusable) learning nets or
learning objects and media objects. Each of the objects found is
imported as a separate object.
Select this option, for example, if you want to import a package
containing learning nets and learning objects.
6. Enter the relevant data depending on the object type.
7. Choose OK .
Result
The files are copied to the local repository or created as reusable objects. They can
be referenced from any learning net or learning object.
288 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 297/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Your Own Content
Linking Content with an Instructional Element
1. You can link existing content with an instructional element.
Prerequisite
To assign content to an instructional element, you must first create a learning
net, or create and insert an instructional element in a learning net structure.
In addition, the existing content must be transferred to the repository.
2. Procedure
1. Select the required instructional element in the Authoring Environment.
2. In the dialog area of the instructional element on the “General” tab
page, choose “Source” Find Source File.
The Select Source File dialog box appears.
3. Select the content you require and choose Select . The file appears
in the Source field.
4. If the file is already in HTML format, select the corresponding HTML
file in the Content field. If it is not available in HTML format, you
must save the content first as a HTML page.
5. Save your entries.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 289
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 298/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating New Content in the Authoring Environment
1. You can create new content for instructional elements in the Authoring
Environment. You can use the same system assignments that you use to edit
content resources. For example, you can create a corresponding source file
directly with Microsoft Word that could then be displayed in the Content
Player and in HTML.
Prerequisites
To create new content in the Authoring Environment, you should have
already created a learning net or created and inserted an instructional
element in a learning net structure. You should already have created the
system assignments you want to use for editing media objects under Tools→
Configuration.
2. Procedure
1. Select the required instructional element in the Authoring Environment.
2. In the dialog area of the instructional element on the General tab page,
choose Edit Media Object .
The Create New Content dialog box appears.
Select the application you want to use to create content.
3. The name proposed for the media object is the name of the instructional
element from the Authoring Environment . You can accept or change
this.
4. Instructional elements are stored in a subdirectory. If you do not want
to create a subdirectory, deselect the indicator.
5. Transfer your entries by choosing OK .
6. The application you selected opens.
7. Create the content and save it as a Web page. The content is
automatically saved to the right directory. The HTML file appears in
the Content field on the General tab page.
8. Save your entries.
ResultYou have created content for an instructional element from the Authoring
Environment and saved it as a HTML file. The instructional element can now be
played in the Content Player.
290 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 299/394
HR270 Lesson: Integrating Your Own Content
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Import existing content to the local repository
• Link existing content with an instructional element
• Create new content in the Authoring Environment
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 291
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 300/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Lesson: Templates Manager
Lesson Overview
You will receive an overview of the options available for implementing and
managing templates within the SAP Authoring Environment.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Outline the advantages of using the Templates Manager
• Create a template for a learning net
• Create a template for a learning object
• Create a template for an instructional element
• Create a template for a test
Business Example
You are the member of a team of course authors. To ensure the uniform appearance
of your WBTs, you want to develop them based on templates that provide the
framework for the structure of the courses and learning objects.
You need to learn about the creation process and how templates are managed in
the Templates Manager of the SAP Authoring Environment.
292 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 301/394
HR270 Lesson: Templates Manager
Templates Manager
Figure 165: Templates Manager
Use
This function enables to you to save, edit, and delete learning nets, learning
objects, instructional elements, and tests as templates. You can assign a specific
name to each template.
You can only use files that are in the same learning object or learning net as
templates.
Hint: Templates are not used for reusable media objects within the SAP
Authoring Environment.
When you create an instructional element or test template, you can edit these
directly and enter information about any other objects that are available for the
instructional elements and tests themselves.
Hint: Bear in mind that any additional files you enter for instructional
element templates and test templates must be stored in the repository.
To edit learning net templates and learning object templates, or to delete
templates, choose Tools→ Templates Manager .
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 293
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 302/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Learning Net Template
1. This function lets you create a learning net template:
Prerequisite
The learning net you want to use as a template must be open in the editor.
2. Procedure
Select the required learning net.
3. Choose File→ Save As Template→ Learning Net .
Hint: If you are navigating in an instructional element or test
element when you call the function Save As Template, you can savethe learning object or learning net to which the current instructional
element or test element belongs as a template.
Result
You have created a learning net template, which you can use and further edit in
the Templates Manager.
294 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 303/394
HR270 Lesson: Templates Manager
Learning Object Template
1. This function lets you create a learning object template.
Prerequisite
The learning object you want to use as a template must be open in the editor.
2. Procedure
Select the required learning object.
3. Choose File→ Save As Template→ Learning Object .
Hint: If you are navigating in an instructional element or test
element when you call the function Save As Template, you can savethe learning object or learning net to which the current instructional
element or test element belongs as a template.
Result
You have created a learning object template, which you can use and further edit in
the Templates Manager.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 295
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 304/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Instructional Element Template
1. This function lets you create an instructional element template.
Prerequisite
The instructional element you want to use as a template must be open in
the editor.
2. Procedure
Select the required instructional element.
3. Choose File→ Save As Template→ Instructional Element .
Hint: If you are navigating in an instructional element or testelement when you call the function Save As Template, you can save
the learning object or learning net to which the current instructional
element or test element belongs as a template.
Result
You have created an instructional element template, which you can use and further
edit in the Templates Manager.
296 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 305/394
HR270 Lesson: Templates Manager
Creating an Instructional Element Template Using theTemplates Manager
1. Procedure
Choose Tools→ Templates Manager .
The Templates Manager dialog box appears.
2. Choose Instructional Element Templates.
Figure 166: Instructional Element Template
3. To create a new template, choose New. The Edit Instructional Element
Template dialog box appears.
Figure 167: Edit Instructional Element Template - “Annotations”
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 297
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 306/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
4. Enter the following data on the General tab page:
• Select the knowledge type you require.
• Select the media type you require.
• Enter a name for the template.
• Select a source file where necessary.
Hint: All of the files for templates must be stored outside the
local repository; they are copied to the local repository when
you create an instance of the template.
• Select a media object where necessary.
5. Choose the Extended tab page.
Figure 168: Edit Instructional Element Template - Extended
• You can specify the learning time for the instructional element template.
• You can specify a metadata (LOM) file. The file you reference should
comply with the IEEE P1484.12 Standard. This entry is optional.
• You can specify a thumbnail image for the instructional element
template that will be displayed in the work area of the editor instead of
a graphical image.6. Choose the Annotations (Remarks) tab page.
Continued on next page
298 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 307/394
HR270 Lesson: Templates Manager
Figure 169: Edit Instructional Element Template - Annotations
You can enter free text notes for the template.
7. Choose the Keywords tab page.
Figure 170: Edit Instructional Element Template - Keywords
Enter keywords for the template if required.
8. Choose Additional Files if there are other files integrated in the content file
(such as a *.gif file that is contained on a HTML page).
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 299
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 308/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Figure 171: Edit Instructional Element Template - Additional Files
• Choose Add.
• The Select Additional Files dialog box appears.
Figure 172: Selecting Additional Files
• Select the file you require.
• The selected file is transferred to the Edit Template for Instructional
Element dialog box.
• Confirm your entries with OK. The Templates Manager dialog box
appears.
• Choose OK.
Result
The instructional element template has been created with the relevant files and
information.
300 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 309/394
HR270 Lesson: Templates Manager
Test Template
1. This function lets you create a test template.
Prerequisite
The test you want to use as a template must be open in the editor.
2. Procedure
1. Select the test you require.
2. Choose File→ Save As Template→ Test .
Hint: If you are navigating in an instructional element or test
element when you call the function Save As Template, you cansave the learning object or learning net to which the current
instructional element or test element belongs as a template.
Result
You have created a test template, which you can use and further edit in the
Templates Manager.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 301
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 310/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating a Test Template Using the Templates Manager
1. Procedure
1. Choose Tools→ Templates Manager . The Templates Manager dialog
box appears.
2. Choose Test Templates.
Figure 173: Templates Manager - Test Templates
3. To create a new template, choose New.
The Edit Test Template dialog box appears.
Figure 174: Edit Test Template - General
Continued on next page
302 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 311/394
HR270 Lesson: Templates Manager
4. Enter the following data under the option General:
• Select the test type to determine how the test can be used [for example,
as a placement test].
• Enter a name for the template.
• Select a source file where necessary.
Hint: All template files must be located outside of the local
repository. They are copied to the local repository when a new
instance of the template is generated.
• Select a media object where necessary.
5. Choose the Extended tab page.
• You can specify the learning time for the instructional element template.
• You can specify a LOM file (optional).
The file you reference should comply with the IEEE P1484.12 Standard.
• You can specify the thumbnail image for the instructional element
template.
This thumbnail image is displayed in the work area instead of the
graphic display of the learning object.
6. Choose the Annotations (Remarks) tab page.
You can enter free text notes for the template.
7. Choose the Keywords tab page.
Enter keywords for the template if required.
8. Choose Additional Files if there are other files integrated in the content file
(such as a *.gif file that is contained on a HTML page).
• Choose Add .
The Select Additional Files dialog box appears.
• Select the file you require.
• The selected file is transferred to the Edit Test Template dialog box.
• Confirm your entries with OK.
The Templates Manager dialog box appears.
• Choose OK.
Result
The test template has been created with the relevant files and information.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 303
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 312/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Outline the advantages of using the Templates Manager
• Create a template for a learning net
• Create a template for a learning object
• Create a template for an instructional element
• Create a template for a test
304 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 313/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Objectives Manager
Lesson: Learning Objectives Manager
Lesson Overview
You will now learn about how to use learning objectives within the SAP Authoring
Environment. In particular, this involves learning how to use the Learning
Objectives Manager.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain how the Learning Objectives Manager manages learning objectives
and synchronizes them with a centralized catalog
• Work with learning objectives (create, import, relate) within the SAPAuthoring Environment
Business Example
You are a content author/instructional designer and want to use learning objectives
to create the content for the learners, together with the other authors. Accordingly,
you not only need to access other authors' content in the master repository, but also
want to set up and maintain a shared learning objectives catalog. Of course, you
also want to assign your learning objects to the learning objectives in this catalog.
Learning Objectives Manager
Figure 175: Learning Objectives Manager
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 305
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 314/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
General
The Learning Objectives Manager provides support when you use existing
learning objectives from the learning objectives catalog or when you create new
learning objectives for learning objects and learning nets, and export them to
the central learning objectives catalog.
Definition
Learning objectives characterize skills and knowledge that a learner can attain by
successfully working through course content. Learning objectives are used in the
SAP Authoring Environment to learners' skills or learning progress, by linking
the successful processing of a learning object with the achievement of a learning
objective. Learning objectives can be created for both learning networks and
learning objects.
When the learner runs a course, the Content Player uses the individually entered
learning objectives to adapt the course to the already recorded learning objectives,
and thus to the learner's level of knowledge. If a learning net or learning object
has learning objectives assigned, you can check whether the learner already has
the associated learning objective (acquired in another course, for example). The
Content Player reacts accordingly:
• If the learner already has all of the learning objectives, the learning net or
object is considered completed and is skipped.
• If the learner does not have all of the learning objectives, the learning net or
object must be completed as normal.
When the learning net or learning object has been completed, the learner's Learner
Account is credited with all of the learning objectives that are flagged as attainable.
Learning Objectives Catalog
From the content author's perspective, the learning objectives are saved in two
learning objectives catalogs. The master learning objectives catalog is located
in the R/3 back-end system.
There is also a local learning objectives catalog located in the Authoring
Environment. If new learning objectives are created offline, these are stored in the
local learning objectives catalog in the Authoring Environment. The locally stored
objectives must be written to the R/3 System. There are two ways of doing this:
• With the automatic refresh function, the learning objectives catalog is
automatically synchronized when the Authoring Environment is started.
• Alternatively, you can trigger catalog synchronisation manually.
306 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 315/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Objectives Manager
Automatic Synchronization
1. Procedure
Choose Tools→ Configuration.
On the Offline tab page, you will find the option Automatically Synchronize
Learning Objectives Catalog . Select this indicator.
Hint: This process may take some time since the whole local
repository must be searched during synchronization.
2. In the Learning Objectives Manager, choose Synchronize Learning
Objectives Catalog .
Using Learning Objectives in the SAP AuthoringEnvironment
To implement the learning concept optimally, you have to create well-defined
learning objectives in the SAP Authoring Environment. In addition, the learning
objects that impart these learning objectives should be linked directly wherever
possible.
The technical procedures are described below.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 307
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 316/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating Learning Objectives
1. Use
You create new learning objectives that you want to be able to assign to
learning nets and learning objects.
Figure 176: Creating a new learning objective
2. Procedure1. To call the Learning Objectives Manager, choose Tools→ Choose
Learning Objectives Manager .
2. Choose New.
3. Enter a name for the learning objective in the learning objectives
workspace.
4. Since the language of the editor determines the language in which you
edit the descriptive text for the learning objective, you cannot change
the default language.
5. In the Performance Description field, you can enter a descriptive text
for the learning objective.6. In the Condition field, you can specify how the acquired knowledge
should be later demonstrated or applied.
7. Choose OK.
Continued on next page
308 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 317/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Objectives Manager
Result
You have created a new learning objective.
Hint: If you create a new objective when working online, it is written
directly to the catalog in the R/3 back-end system as well. If you create
an objective when working offline, it is only stored in the local learning
objectives catalog in the Authoring Environment.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 309
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 318/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Learning Objectives at the Level of Learning Nets
Use
You can assign existing learning objectives to learning nets. You can create new
learning objectives and assign them immediately to learning nets.
Procedure
1. Select the learning net to which you want to assign a learning objective.
2. In the Edit Learning Net dialog area, choose the Add Learning
Objectives tab page.
3. The Select More Learning Objectives dialog box appears. In the
catalog, select the learning objective you want to assign to the learning
net, or create a new one.4. The objective is transferred to the Edit Learning Net dialog box. The
Attainable indicator is set by default.
Hint: This means that the learner will be credited with the
learning objective when he or she has completed the learning
net in the Content Player.
Caution: If a learning objective is not attainable, the Content
Player only checks whether the learner already has the learning
objective so that it can skip the learning net. Objectives that arenot flagged as attainable cannot be attained by working through
the learning net to which they are assigned.
5. Save your entries.
Result
You have assigned a learning objective in the learning objective catalog to the
corresponding learning net.
Learning Objectives and the Different Objects in theSAP Authoring Environment
The previous section described how to create and assign learning objectives, based
on learning nets. The procedure for assigning learning objectives to learning
objects is similar.
310 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 319/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Objectives Manager
As you will see in the next lesson, learning objectives are particularly important
for tests – after all, the tests are intended to verify that the learning objectives have
been achieved. Of course, a placement test can also be aligned to the learningobjectives of the learning net which references the test.
Hint: You cannot assign leaarning objectives to tests in learning nets /
objects.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 311
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 320/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Learning Objectives in Placement Tests
Prerequisites
You have defined learning objectives and assigned them to a learning net.
Procedure
1. Select a section in the test structure.
2. Choose Extras→ Import Objectives. A message is displayed that item
groups have been created with learning objectives assigned.
3. All learning objectives have been imported from the learning net.
4. Group the item groups together under the relevant sections per
Drag&Drop.
Result
You have created item groups with learning objectives assigned and grouped them
into sections where relevant.
Learning Objectives in Final Tests / Online Tests
Final tests and online tests can be aligned to the learning objectives of the learning
net which references the tests.
The procedure is the same as for placement tests.
312 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 321/394
HR270 Lesson: Learning Objectives Manager
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Explain how the Learning Objectives Manager manages learning objectives
and synchronizes them with a centralized catalog
• Work with learning objectives (create, import, relate) within the SAP
Authoring Environment
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 313
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 322/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Lesson: Test Editor
Lesson Overview
You gain an overview of the functions and options offered by the Test Editor in
the Authoring Environment.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Distinguish between the different types of tests in the SAP Learning Solution
• Create different types of tests (multiple choice, gap test/fill-in, and so on)
• Prepare tests for learners: Provide with feedback, generate, play
Business Example
You are an instructional designer/author and want to add tests to your courses or
create so-called online tests as standalone learning units.
Tests in the SAP Learning Solution
Integrated criterion-referenced testing accompanies the learning process. Tests are
one of the best ways of swiftly identifying knowledge gaps. They help pinpoint
effective learning measures that can close knowledge gaps through achievement
of defined learning objectives.
The test environment of the SAP Learning Solution enables you to develop,
manage, and implement Web-based test strategies. The test environment provides
a variety of test types and formats. It includes a test editor, the “Test Author” for
creating test items and tests.
314 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 323/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Figure 177: Test Editor in the SAP Learning Solution
With the help of the Test Editor tool, trainers, course authors, instructional
designers, and test administrators can plan, design, create and manage tests
and feedback measures efficiently. By determining the learner’s skills and
knowledge, the test environment allows individual adaptation of the learning
process, monitoring of learning progress, and evaluation of the training process
and its effectiveness.
You can use the Test Author to:
• Create and edit tests
• Create and edit test items
• Create and edit test pools and item pools
The Test Author includes the following functions:
• Templates for creating test items
• Configurable scoring models for items and answers
• Configuration of test conditions, such as the test duration• Configuration of differentiated scoring methods at the level of learning
objectives and sections
• Configuration of tests and differentiated feedback
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 315
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 324/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Tests as Instructional Elements – Placement Tests andFinal Tests
Placement tests, the results of which are stored, are taken prior to a course.
They are criterion-referenced tests whose purpose is to adapt the course to the
individual needs of the learner.
Results at the level of the learning objectives are stored in the Learner Account in
the SAP Learning Solution. The test results are also saved at test item level in the
results database, to enable empirical analyses.
Final tests, the results of which are stored, are taken on conclusion of a course.
They are criterion-referenced tests used to evaluate progress. Results at the level
of the learning objectives are stored in the Learner Account in the SAP Learning
Solution. If the results storage feature has been activated for the test, the learner’s
results are stored in the results database for reporting purposes here too.
The final test is generally helpful for learners to assess their own knowledge – in
addition to its motivational effects as self-confirmation.
316 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 325/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Creating a Placement Test or Final Test
Prerequisites
You have already created a learning net in the structure editor of the Authoring
Environment. You call the structure editor from the learning net structure of the
SAP Learning Solution.
Procedure
1. Procedure
1. In the Authoring Environment, in the learning net dialog area, choose
Extended .
2. Choose Edit Placement Test Edit Final Test to create content for the
placement test in the Test Author . The Create New Test dialog boxappears.
3. If you want to save the placement or final test as a reusable object,
set the relevant indicator.
4. The name of the learning net from the Authoring Environment is
proposed as the title of the test file. You can either change or accept
this name.
5. If you want to save the placement or final test as a reusable object,
set the relevant indicator.
6. Select a folder in which to store the test file.
7. Confirm your entries with OK.8. The Test Author editor appears. The title of the placement or final test
is inserted beside the test icon.
9. Save your entries.
Result
You have created a placement test or final test in the Test Author . You can now
edit the test attributes.
Online Tests
An online test is a standalone test that is independent of a learning net. It can be
used for various purposes and taken at different times. Unlike placement tests or
final tests, which are placed directly before or after a course, an online test is
standalone and can be taken independently of a course.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 317
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 326/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Figure 178: Online Test
You create online tests in the Authoring Environment of the SAP Learning Solution
and create content for them in the Test Author.
318 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 327/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Creating an Online Test
Prerequisites
You have created an online test in the structure editor of the Authoring
Environment.
Procedure
1. In the Authoring Environment , in the online test dialog area, choose Edit Test .
The Create New Test dialog box appears.
2. The name of the online test from the Authoring Environment is proposed as
the title of the test file. You can either change or accept this name.
3. If you want to save the online test as a reusable object, set the relevantindicator.
4. Select a folder in which to store the test file.
5. Confirm your entries with OK.
6. The Test Author editor appears. The title of the online test is inserted beside
the test icon.
7. Save your entries.
Result
You have created an online test in the Test Author . You can now edit the testattributes.
Structuring Tests
The procedure for creating and editing tests is the same, regardless of the test type.
In the Test Author , you can create tests as you see fit for a variety of instructional
and testing purposes. To do so, you create the entire test “top-down”. The
corresponding procedures follow in the same order:
1. Creating the Test Structure
2. Creating Sections
3. Import objectives from the learning net (if possible)
4. Creating Item Groups
5. Create items
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 319
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 328/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating the Test Structure
Prerequisites
You have created a test in the SAP Authoring Environment and opened it in the
Test Author.
Procedure
1. You enter the required test attributes.
2. You create the sections you require (see next procedure).
3. You enter the section attributes.
4. You import the objectives of the learning net (see procedure after next). You
create item groups with corresponding learning objectives. You combineitem groups that belong together into a section.
5. If necessary, you create more item groups (see next to last procedure in this
section). Item groups let you structure items thematically.
6. You enter the item group attributes.
7. You create the items (see last procedure in this section).
Result
You have created a test. You have created a test that you can display for checking
purposes in the Content Player .
320 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 329/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Creating Sections
Use
Sections are located one level below the test node in the test structure. They
combine item groups.
The following functions are available for sections:
• Test results can be determined at section level.
• You can provide feedback per section for the test participant regarding how
the items were answered.
Procedure
1. Select the test node and choose New Section.A dialog box appears.
2. Enter the title of the section and choose Transfer.
3. Repeat these steps until you have created all the sections you require.
4. Specify the section attributes.
5. Save your entries.
Result
You have created a section whose title is displayed beside the relevant icon. You
can further structure the test content into item groups and create test items.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 321
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 330/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Importing Learning Objectives from the Learning Netto the Test
Use
When you define learning objectives, you consider the correlation between
instruction and tests. This enables you to determine knowledge acquisition swiftly
and flexibly. Progress is determined and recorded by means of tests and quizzes.
You can align a test to the learning objectives of the learning net on which the
test is based. In the test structure, a learning objective is always assigned to an
item group.
Prerequisites
This function is not available for tests in learning nets or learning objects because
there is no possibility to assign learning objectives at that point. You have definedlearning objectives and assigned them to learning nets.
Procedure
1. Select a section in the test structure.
2. To start the import, choose Extras→ Import Learning Objectives.
A message is displayed that item groups have been created with learning
objectives assigned.
Hint: You can only import all learning objectives together out of a
learning net.
3. Group the item groups together under the relevant sections per Drag&Drop.
The item groups you move are then displayed under the sections.
Result
You have created item groups with learning objectives assigned and grouped them
into sections where relevant.
322 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 331/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Creating Item Groups
Use
Item groups are located one level below sections in the test structure. They group
test items thematically. The following functions are available for item groups:
• Test results can be determined at item group level.
• You can provide feedback per item group for the test participant regarding
how the items were answered.
Prerequisites
You have created a section in the test structure.
Procedure1. Select the relevant section and choose New Item Group. A dialog box
appears.
2. Enter the title of the item group and choose Transfer.
3. Repeat these steps until you have created all the item groups you require.
4. Specify the item attributes.
5. Save your entries.
Result
You have created a new item group.
Its title is displayed beside the corresponding icon.
You can now create items for the item group.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 323
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 332/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Creating Items
Use
Items represent the actual test content for the test participant. Test items enable
you to test the skills and knowledge imparted by a course.
You can select from different item types. The Test Author provides a special
item format template for each item type.
Prerequisites
You have created an item group in the Test Author.
Procedure
1. Procedure
In your test structure, select the item group under which the item should
be created.
2. Choose New Item.
The Create Item dialog box appears.
3. Select the item type you require and choose Continue. The SAP Item Editor
appears. The item format template belonging to the item type is opened.
4. Edit the required texts, scale values, and weighting.
5. Specify the item attributes.
6. Repeat this procedure until you have created as many items as you require.
7. Save your entries.
Result
You have created items and assigned them to the corresponding item groups. You
can now generate the test and view the test preview.
324 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 333/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Editing and Generating Tests
Regardless of the test design, it is important that you now specify the following
test attributes:
• The minimum pass score is the percentage score that must be reached to
pass a test. If you do not require this criterion, enter 0 (zero).
• A test value range contains a value range from the maximum achievable
value to the minimum achievable value. You can store a text for each of the
test value ranges. If you select the corresponding option, the feedback text is
displayed along with the test value achieved by the participant.
• Feedback can be given for each test, section, item group, item or answer
.Feedback for items is recorded as an attribute in the item editor. If you want
to give participants a chance to compare their answers with the right answers,
you must select the attribute Answer . You create feedback at test level usingthe attributes Feedback for Test Passed, Feedback for Test Failed and Web
Link (URL) in Feedback. Feedback details are displayed to the participant
on completion of the test in HTML.
Now that you have structured the test, there are numerous features available for
formatting it attractively and using varied types of questions. The various item
types are explained briefly in the next section. You can then do the following
at test level:
• insert existing items into the test
• edit items
• before you then generate and display the test.
The corresponding procedures are explained later.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 325
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 334/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Inserting an Existing Item into a Test
Use
Test items are the individual elements that make up a test. You can create new
items or insert existing items in a test.
Prerequisites
You have created an item using the Test Author in the local repository or copied
an item from the master repository of the Authoring Environment to the local
repository.
Procedure
1. In your test structure, select the item group under which the item should
be inserted.
2. Right-click the item group and in the context menu choose Insert Item. The
Open File dialog box appears.
3. In the file selection dialog, navigate to the item file you want to insert in the
test. Select the required item file and choose Select .
4. The selected item and its attributes are inserted under the selected test node.
5. Save your entries.
Result
You have inserted the item in the required position in the test structure. You can
now edit the item where necessary.
326 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 335/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Editing Items
Use
Of course, you can also edit an item or a reference item after you have created
it in the test.
Prerequisites
You have created an item in the local repository using the Test Author or copied
an item from the master repository of the Authoring Environment to the local
repository.
Procedure
1. Choose File→ Open Item.
The Open File dialog box appears.
2. Select the required item file and choose Select .
The selected item is opened in the SAP Item Editor .
3. Edit the required texts, values, and attributes.
4. Save your entries.
5. Editing an Item Referenced in a Test
1. Select the item to be edited in the test structure.
2. Right-click the item and in the context menu choose Edit Item.The selected item is opened in the SAP Item Editor .
3. Edit the required texts, values, and attributes.
4. Save your entries.
Result
You have changed or edited the texts and values for the item.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 327
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 336/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Generating Tests
Use
You can generate a test created in the Test Author and display the generated test
content in the Internet browser.
Hint: Checks are performed when you generate the test content. A
message informs you if errors occurred during the generation.
Prerequisites
• You have saved the test and the test structure is valid.
• A referenced introduction file and all referenced items, including referenced
media objects are available in the local repository.• You have installed Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.x or 6.x for the display.
Procedure
1. To start generation of the test content, choose Extras→ Generate Test .
2. A progress display appears that informs you about the progress of the test
content generation.
3. To display the test content, choose Extras→ Test Preview.
4. The test is displayed in the Internet Explorer. If you included an introduction,
this is also displayed.
5. Choose Start Test to start the test. Choose Finish Test to end the test.
Result
• Playable test content compliant with SCORM1.1 has been created.
• You can display, check, and print out the current test.
328 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 337/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Item Types
The Test Editor allows you create the following conventional item types with ease:
• MC items are multiple choice questions that have one right answer. There
may be any number of possible answers, from which the participant must
select one right answer. The MC item can be weighted variably in the test.
You can integrate a graphic in the question.
• Die MR items require the test participant to select all of the right answers
from a set of possible answers > 1. The MR item can be analyzed according
to different models. You can integrate a graphic in the question.
• Free text questions (also called gap tests or fill-in items) require the
participants to type in the right answer themselves. The participant's answer
is matched against the right answer and multiple synonyms. If a match is
found, the item is answered correctly.
You can normally integrate graphics in these questions and weight them variably.
This type of item is typically used in instructional tests and performance tests;
fill-in items are typically used to test the participant's ability to reproduce facts.
Scaling questions or evaluations are not test items. They are used in surveys. The
survey participant must rate a given object (course, trainer and so on) on a scale.
The verbal anchors of the answer scale are freely definable and can be assigned
values of your choice. You can integrate a graphic in the question.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 329
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 338/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
When you create items, you must enter the following information:
• Title
You enter a descriptive text for the item content.
• Question
You formulate the text of the actual question or statement.
• Note
Enter an instruction for the test participant regarding how to edit the item.
In an MC item, you can specify whether the participant must select one
or more answers.
• Alternative answersFormulate the alternative answers. In MC items, you flag only one answer as
correct. In MR items, you flag at least two answers as correct.
• Answer weighting
You can assign a number of points for each alternative answer. At least one
of the answers must be assigned a score of > 0.
You assign right answers a score of 1 and wrong answers a score of 0. In
this case, the test participant can achieve the maximum number of points for
the item by selecting all possible answers. The participant is awarded all
of the points for the right answers.
In contrast to this, you can assign a score of 1 for both right and wrong
answers. In this case, a positive score is attained if the participant selects the
right answers and does not select the wrong answers.
• Solution
You enter possible solutions for a fill-in item, which the participant must
complete. You can enter synonyms that are also accepted as right.
For example, you specify that both the text four and the digit 4 are allowed.
• Scale texts
In evaluations or ratings, you specify a value scale with individual textsfor each value.
330 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 339/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Exercise 9: Creating Web Based Courses
with the SAP Authoring EnvironmentExercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• List the functions of the SAP Authoring Environment
• Create new learning nets, learning objects, and instructional elements
• Create HTML content for your instructional element
Business Example
As the training administrator in your enterprise, you want to create a WBTor convert a course purchased from an external training provider and make it
available to employees in the Learning Portal.
Task 1:
Start by creating a Web Based Training that introduces the SAP Learning Solution.
1. First create an empty learning net, SAP_LS_##, in a new folder, “SAPLS##”.
2. Create the following references according to the structure described here.
First, create three higher-level learning objects. Once you create the
instructional elements, save the structure you have created so far.
Figure 179: Creating Your Own Learning Net
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 331
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 340/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
3. Create content files for the individual instructional elements that you can edit
with standard Microsoft products.
Hint: Because you have not configured any other settings, you
have simply used the Windows settings so far to display and edit
the content files. Each file is automatically associated with the
corresponding edit program through its three-character “extension”.
For these simple cases, we will neither assume that the objects will be reused
nor use a separate folder.
4. Before you close the learning objects, create relationships between them
as described below.
Figure 180: Learning objects
Task 2:
Configuration of the Authoring Environment
Before you assign content to the instructional elements or create content yourself,
you must make a few basic settings in the Authoring Environment for professional
content authors.
Initially, however, you can associate content editors and the browser (HTMLviewer) with different types of files for display and editing.
1. Start the Authoring Environment again and save your Word source files
in HTML format in the same folder. Select this file for display in the
appropriate instructional element.
Caution: However, keep the Word file as your basis for later edits.
Continued on next page
332 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 341/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
2. Another situation is when the course author wants to use different tools for
display and editing, but the same source file. Assume, for example, that you
want to use Word files exclusively, but you want to use the user's displaysoftware – that is, the browser – to display the files.
Accordingly, you want to use the Microsoft “Internet Explorer” to display
files with extension “.doc”.
Task 3:
Using Learning Objectives
1. Start the Learning Objectives Manager
2. Add a new learning objective to the catalog:
Objective_01_## (## is your group number).
3. Synchronize the learning objectives catalog.
4. Assign your learning objective to the second learning objectives as an
“attainable” learning objective. Assign this learning objective to the first and
third learning objects as well, but not as “attainable”.
5. Start the Content Player and open the table of contents to enable you to track
navigation in the course. Navigate through the course. What happens in the
table of contents when you close/complete a learning object?
Task 4:
Test Author
1. Create a new instructional element of the type “Test” in the learning object
“Authoring Environment”.
2. Use the Test Author to create the following multiple choice item for the
test you just created.
Figure 181: Test Author
3. Create feedback of your choice for the item group and check the results of
your work.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 333
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 342/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Task 5:
(Optional) Level of detail in the learning objects
1. Enter any information you feel is sensible in the dialog boxes.
334 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 343/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Solution 9: Creating Web Based Courses
with the SAP Authoring EnvironmentTask 1:
Start by creating a Web Based Training that introduces the SAP Learning Solution.
1. First create an empty learning net, SAP_LS_##, in a new folder, “SAPLS##”.
a) Choose File→ New→ Learning Net to start the appropriate wizard.
Name your learning net SAP_LS_## and click Continue. Now click the
folder icon and create a new folder under “Select Folder” by clicking
the icon on the upper right. Enter “SAPLS##” as the name and in the
next dialog box, choose “Select”.
b) When you click “Accept Current List”, you go directly to the “Finish.”
2. Create the following references according to the structure described here.
First, create three higher-level learning objects. Once you create the
instructional elements, save the structure you have created so far.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 335
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 344/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Figure 182: Creating Your Own Learning Net
a) Right-click on your learning net in the learning net overview and
choose “New Learning Object”. Another wizard starts. Enter the first
default name, “Learning Portal”.
Click “Create no Template” and “Empty (no template)” and then
“Finish”.
Hint: Of course, in a genuine environment, you would havetemplates with the appropriate enterprise guidelines here.
Repeat the process for the learning objects for the “Authoring
Environment” and “Training Management”.
b) Right-click on learning object “Learning Portal” in the learning net
overview and choose “New - Instructional Element” to create a new
instructional element. Enter “Functions available” (the later name of
the element) as the name. Then choose “Continue” twice and then
“Finish” to reach the selection of the corresponding knowledge type.
Select “Orientation-Overview”, for example, as the “Knowledge Type”.
c) Repeat the process for the additional instructional elements for at least
the first learning net object, and one each for the others.
d) File→ Save All .
Continued on next page
336 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 345/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
3. Create content files for the individual instructional elements that you can edit
with standard Microsoft products.
Hint: Because you have not configured any other settings, you
have simply used the Windows settings so far to display and edit
the content files. Each file is automatically associated with the
corresponding edit program through its three-character “extension”.
For these simple cases, we will neither assume that the objects will be reused
nor use a separate folder.
a) In the learning net overview, click on instructional element “Functions
available”.
b) You can now click the icon to edit the media object in the frame below.
You can enter “doc”, for example, under “Extension”.
Aside from this, leave all the fields as they are and deactivate the two
options for reusability and separate folder before you click “OK” to
confirm.
c) Because you defined extension "doc", Word is launched automatically
to generate the corresponding file. You can now enter the actual texts
and images that the learner will see later in the browser.
d) Exit the application (Word), save the file, and confirm any prompts
regarding text formats with “Yes”. Then return to the AuthoringEnvironment and click "Cancel" to close the warning from the external
application.
e) You can repeat this process for other instructional elements. Of course,
you can also use other extensions that you know about. If you are
familiar with HTML, for example, you can use “htm” to create the
source text.
4. Before you close the learning objects, create relationships between them
as described below.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 337
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 346/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Figure 183: Learning objects
a) Double-click the learning net so that your three objects are displayed
in the workspace. Select the relationship “Before”. Click the object
“Learning Portal” and drag and drop the relationship to Training
Management or the Authoring Environment.
b) File→ Save All .
c) File→ Close All.
Task 2:
Configuration of the Authoring Environment
Before you assign content to the instructional elements or create content yourself,
you must make a few basic settings in the Authoring Environment for professional
content authors.
Initially, however, you can associate content editors and the browser (HTML
viewer) with different types of files for display and editing.
1. Start the Authoring Environment again and save your Word source files
in HTML format in the same folder. Select this file for display in the
appropriate instructional element.
Continued on next page
338 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 347/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Caution: However, keep the Word file as your basis for later edits.
a) Start → Programs→ SAP Learning Solution→ Authoring Environment
b) Open your learning net, SAP_LS_##, open the objects in the learning
net overview, and select instructional element “Functions available”.
c) Again, click the “Edit Media Object” icon to launch Word. Now save
this file in HTML format in Word ( File→ Save As→ Save as type)
and close Word.
d) In the Authoring Environment, close the warning from the external
applications with “Cancel” before you enter the source file for display
and the source file for editing.
e) Now choose the saved HTML file as the source file for display bychoosing the appropriate folder icon.
f) Clicking the different icons will now launch different applications to
display and edit the instructional element.
2. Another situation is when the course author wants to use different tools for
display and editing, but the same source file. Assume, for example, that you
want to use Word files exclusively, but you want to use the user's display
software – that is, the browser – to display the files.
Accordingly, you want to use the Microsoft “Internet Explorer” to display
files with extension “.doc”.
a) Tools→ Configuration→ Associations
Click “New” under “For Displaying Content”. A wizard starts.
b) Displaying Content → Select Application Manually →
c:\Programme\Internet Explorer\iexplore.exe -Name (such as) Browse,
and then enter “doc” as the extension with “Add” in step 5 of the wizard.
You can deactivate the content player for this display before you click
“Finish” to close the wizard and “OK” to exit the configuration.
c) Now open one of your instructional elements with one Word source file
and click “Display Media Object”. The Internet Explorer is launched
without the content player and calls the Word document.
Task 3:
Using Learning Objectives
1. Start the Learning Objectives Manager
a) Tools→ Learning Objectives Manager
2. Add a new learning objective to the catalog:
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 339
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 348/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Objective_01_## (## is your group number).
a) Choose “New”, make the entries you require (instructional designers
use common learning objective classifications), choose “Apply” and
“OK”.
3. Synchronize the learning objectives catalog.
a) File→Work Online (your instructor will help you)
b) Open the Learning Objectives Manager again and click “Online
Catalog - Synchronize ...”. Your learning object now appears in the
online catalog.
c) Click the Offline tab to make sure that your local learning objective
catalog has been supplemented.
4. Assign your learning objective to the second learning objectives as an
“attainable” learning objective. Assign this learning objective to the first and
third learning objects as well, but not as “attainable”.
a) In the learning net overview, select the relevant object and, in the dialog
area, choose the “Learning Objectives” tab page. Choose “Add”,
Select, “Add” to assign the new learning objective to the respective
learning object. For the first and third learning objects, deactivate the
“attainable” field in the top right dialog area.
5. Start the Content Player and open the table of contents to enable you to track
navigation in the course. Navigate through the course. What happens in the
table of contents when you close/complete a learning object?
a) Choose File→ Save All and Tools→ Play Learning Net. Open the
table of contents. When you work through the first learning object
completely, you have not yet achieved the learning objective associated
with it. When you work through the second learning object completely,
however, the last object is also flagged as “Processed” (“Content
Known” would be better) – and skipped.
Task 4:
Test Author
1. Create a new instructional element of the type “Test” in the learning object
“Authoring Environment”.
a) Right-click on “Authoring Environment” and choose New Element →
Test . Enter “Test_##” as the name in the wizard. The familiar closing
window appears, where you can leave “Self-Assessment Test” as the
test type.
Continued on next page
340 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 349/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
2. Use the Test Author to create the following multiple choice item for the
test you just created.
Figure 184: Test Author
a) Select the test you just created in the learning net overview. Go to
“Edit Media Object” in the dialog area, confirm the Test Author, and
click OK.
b) Right-click the item group under Test__## / Section and choose “New
Item”. Choose am MC item.
c) Enter a title (such as “Editor”), question, and the first possible answer
“SAP Tutor” in the appropriate fields.
You see a message in the message box indicating that the correct
answer is still missing.
d) Click the “Add a New Answer” icon next to the first answer to create
additional answers.
Choose “Test Editor” as the correct answer by clicking the field next to
it. A green checkmark appears.
e) Item→ Save
Item→ Exit
3. Create feedback of your choice for the item group and check the results of
your work.
a) Select the item group and create feedback of your choice. To do so,
click the icons in the appropriate fields, enter texts, and click OK to
confirm.
Remember that you can also submit feedback at the “Test” and “Item”
levels.
b) Choose Extras→ Test Preview and check whether you are satisfied
with the result.
c) File→ Save
File→ Exit
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 341
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 350/394
Unit 9: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Content Editing HR270
Task 5:
(Optional) Level of detail in the learning objects
1. Enter any information you feel is sensible in the dialog boxes.
a) Select an instructional element in the learning net overview.
b) Enter the planned completion time under tab “Extended”. Enter
remarks and keywords in the corresponding tabs.
c) Repeat the above steps for all the instructional elements.
d) Check the planned completion time of the learning objects and enter
topic descriptions for them under “Subject”.
342 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 351/394
HR270 Lesson: Test Editor
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Distinguish between the different types of tests in the SAP Learning Solution
• Create different types of tests (multiple choice, gap test/fill-in, and so on)
• Prepare tests for learners: Provide with feedback, generate, play
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 343
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 352/394
Unit Summary HR270
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Create a learning net
• Maintain the attributes of a learning net
• Create a learning object
• Maintain the attributes of a learning object
• Create an instructional element
• Maintain the attributes of an instructional element
• Import existing content to the local repository
• Link existing content with an instructional element
• Create new content in the Authoring Environment
• Outline the advantages of using the Templates Manager
• Create a template for a learning net
• Create a template for a learning object
• Create a template for an instructional element
• Create a template for a test
• Explain how the Learning Objectives Manager manages learning objectives
and synchronizes them with a centralized catalog
• Work with learning objectives (create, import, relate) within the SAP
Authoring Environment
• Distinguish between the different types of tests in the SAP Learning Solution
• Create different types of tests (multiple choice, gap test/fill-in, and so on)
• Prepare tests for learners: Provide with feedback, generate, play
344 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 353/394
Unit 10 SAP LS Authoring Environment –
Repository Explorer
Unit Overview
You will acquire an overview of the functions and options contained in theRepository Explorer of the SAP Learning Solution. You will learn how to check
courses in, release them, and assign them attributes for Training Management.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Explain the process-related difference between online and offline working
• Distinguish between the procedure for working online and offline
• Define the purpose of a local repository
• Create a local repository• List the tasks of the master repository
Unit Contents
Lesson: Playing Online/Offline................................................346Lesson: Repository Explorer ..................................................349
Procedure: Check In .... .... .... .... ... .... ... .... .... .... ... .... .... .... ..354Procedure: Copying........................................................358
Procedure: Managing Content.... ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... 359
Procedure: Content Search...............................................361
Procedure: Content Versioning ... ... .. .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. ... .. ... ... .363Exercise 10: Publishing with the Repository Explorer .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .365
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 345
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 354/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Lesson: Playing Online/Offline
Lesson Overview
You will learn the differences between working online and offline in the SAP
Authoring Environment.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain the process-related difference between online and offline working
• Distinguish between the procedure for working online and offline
Business Example
You are a subject matter expert/instructional designer responsible for creating
e-learning units that can be put together to form courses. You do not always have
the opportunity to work online in your Authoring Environment. Accordingly, you
want to find out which activities require you to have a connection between your PC
and your company network, and how you can configure the corresponding settings.
As a content author, you need to know which functions are available when you
work online and which ones are available when you work offline.
Offline PlayingWhen you work offline, you only have access to learning nets that are stored on
your local hard disk or in the local repository.
You cannot read an objective from the catalog and you cannot access learning nets
and objects in the master repository.
Choose File→ Work Offline.
Online Playing
Figure 185: Working Online
When you work online, you are simultaneously logged on to the ERP2005 system
and the master repository.
346 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 355/394
HR270 Lesson: Playing Online/Offline
You can do the following:
• Use the learning objectives catalog and synchronize learning objectives that
you created offline (locally) to make them available in all learning nets. To
do so, you save the learning objectives to the ERP2005 system using the
Synchronize function.
• Transfer data between local and master repository
• Check objects in and out
• Copy objects [new version of objects, administration of master repository]
• Release objects
• Publish learning nets
• Preview objects
• Search for objectsChoose File→ Work Offline.
Hint: You will find other online editing settings in the menu under Tools
→ Configuration. In the dialog box that appears, choose Online.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 347
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 356/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Explain the process-related difference between online and offline working
• Distinguish between the procedure for working online and offline
348 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 357/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
Lesson: Repository Explorer
Lesson Overview
You will receive an overview of how learning objects are exchanged between the
course authors' local repositories and the master repository in the SAP Learning
Solution.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Define the purpose of a local repository
• Create a local repository
• List the tasks of the master repository
Business Example
You are a course author/instructional designer responsible for creating e-learning
units that can be put together to form courses, or that can be reused by other
authors.
Introduction
Figure 186: Terminology
The purpose of the Repository Explorer is to administer course content. The main
function of the Repository Explorer is the exchange of data between the local
and master repositories.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 349
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 358/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Content can be displayed and edited in the local repository. During installation,
you have to set up the path to the directory in which the local repository is to be
created (for example: “C:/Programme/SAP/Local Rep/default”).
The master repository is the central content repository that can be accessed by all
authors. It is located in the Content Management System of the Portal server, for
example. The functions available in the Explorer are for learning nets, learning
objects, and reusable media objects.
Figure 187: The Training Content Cycle
Training contents run through the following statuses during the authoring process:
1. Objects can be edited locally by creating them locally or importing them.
2. The “check-in” process transports the objects to the master repository, where
they are visible to other course authors.
Caution: No Change Function in Master Repository
Objects that are checked into the master repository cannot be
changed. If you want to change the content, you must edit it in
order to create a new version. Consequently, when other content
authors reuse external objects, they can be sure that these objects
will not change.
3. If the objects are “released”, other authors can reuse them or reference them
in their learning nets.
4. If the objects are “published”, this information is incorporated into the
course catalog. They are now available in Training Administration (for WBT
creation, for example), where booked learners can play them. Obsolete
publications can be overwritten in the process.
350 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 359/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
In general, this cycle starts over from the beginning when an object is copied
from the master repository to a local repository – for example, to improve it or
modify it for new courses.
Figure 188: Data Transfer of Repositories
Note that every change to an object that has been checked into the master
repository creates a new version of that object there. Once an object version has
been checked in, it cannot be changed. The versioning concept ensures that a
learner who interrupts a course is always provided with the same version of
the course on reentry, even if a new version of the course has appeared in the
meantime. Versioning is also important in the context of reusability. You can
decide what version of an object should be referenced in a given context (learning
net) and you can be sure that the version referenced cannot be changed by the
author. Version management is largely automated by means of corresponding
appendices to the object names. Only one version of an object can exist locally,
even without active involvement on the part of the author.
Caution: Dual Name Range
The namespaces in both the local and master repositories are arranged inthe same hierarchy. This means that an object stored in the local repository
will be transferred to the same namespace in the master repository and
vice versa. Consequently, you must pay particular attention to the storage
location of an object when you create it since you cannot change this
afterwards.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 351
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 360/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Working with the SAP Repository Explorer
Figure 189: Starting the Repository Explorer
You can either start the Repository Explorer from within the Authoring
Environment or call it directly as an independent program. The left frame contains
the local repository and the right frame the master repository (assuming you are
online).
You may find it useful to Display New Versions. You use this function in the
master repository to find new versions of objects selected locally. You may do
this, for example, if you want to know if the author has updated an object you are
using locally. New versions are highlighted in bold font in the master repository.
New versions that have been released can be reused. You can display a preview of
the new version in the browser. Possible version conflicts can be resolved You can
return to the normal view via the master repository view.
352 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 361/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
Figure 190: Icon Functions
As a course author or administrator who knows how to use the Repository
Explorer, you recognize all the important information for repository objects at a
glance. There is a separate icon for practically all the objects in the Learning
Solution.
Figure 191: Icon Functions
In turn, their status is indicated by various small flags (see diagram).
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 353
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 362/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Check In
Use
Check-in allows data transfer from the local repository to the master repository.
Data is stored in the master repository and can be displayed by other authors
when it is released.
When you execute the function, a check-in wizard guides you through the process.
The check-in wizard lets you automatically add all dependent objects to the
check-in list.
Before checking the objects in, you should ensure that all object dependencies
have been maintained correctly. All files belonging to an object are checked in,
even unchanged files.
The check-in wizard provides a consistency check on cross-references betweenobjects and their dependencies.
At check-in, you also have the option of creating a copy of the check-in object
in the local repository.
Prerequisites
To be able to check in an object, you must be working online and have set up a
connection to the master repository. To do this, choose Connect in the master
repository.
Continued on next page
354 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 363/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
Procedure
1. In the local repository, select one or more objects for check-in.
2. Choose Check in.
The dialog box Check-In Wizard appears.
3. If you want cross-references checked for consistency, set the
appropriate indicator.
4. Choose Continue.
Caution: In rare cases, the system may identify a version
conflict during the check-in. Such a conflict occurs when the
objects you want to check in indirectly reference different
versions of an object. When this is the case, you must choose
the version that you want to use for the objects you wantto check in.
5. A dialog box may appear indicating structure errors in the objects to be
checked in. You can ignore these errors and proceed with the check-in.
However, you may not be able to release the objects later on if you do
so. Alternatively, you can cancel the check-in and correct the errors.
6. In the dialog box that appears, you have the following options:
• Check the list of objects for transport. Check, in particular,
whether all dependent objects are included in the list. If this is not
the case, leave the check-in wizard and edit the dependencies in
the local repository by choosing Edit Attributes→ Dependencies.
• If you want to keep a copy in the local repository of the objects to
be checked in, select the relevant indicator.
7. Choose Start .
Result
The selected objects are checked into the master repository with their dependent
objects. The objects are flagged with the relevant icons.
System Feedback During Check-In
There are a number of messages that can be displayed on check-in.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 355
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 364/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
The following message types are possible:
• Learning objective error
• Empty learning net
• Learning object
• Instructional elements
• Obsolete content
• Dependency error
• Missing anchor file
• Cross-reference error
Learning objective error
The learning net / learning object contains invalid learning objectives or an invalidsystem ID.
You cannot continue the check-in when this error message appears.
To correct the error, you must open the object in the Authoring Environment.
Empty learning net/object
The learning net/learning object contains no subordinate learning nets, learning
objects or instructional elements.
Obsolete content
The content generated for the object (for example, for a test) is obsolete. To
correct the error, you must open the object in the Authoring Environment and
generate the content again.
Dependency error
The object uses media objects that have not been registered explicitly. To correct
the error, add the dependencies to the object. To do so, select the object in the local
repository and choose Edit Attributes→ Dependencies.
Missing anchor file
No anchor file exists for an object. This means that the object cannot be referenced by other objects.
This error usually only occurs when you have deleted the anchor file manually,
that is, outside of the Authoring Environment. To correct the error, you must
either delete the object completely and create it again, or create the anchor file
again manually.
Cross-reference error
The object contains references to unknown or invalid objects.
356 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 365/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
To correct the error, edit the object and adjust the cross-reference accordingly.
Caution: Cross references are only checked for SAP LS AE proprietaryfile types. Thus, an error-free check-in is no guarantee that all of the
cross-references in the objects are correct.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 357
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 366/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Copying
Use
Copying enables the transfer of data from the master repository to the local
repository. An exact copy of each object is generated. This can be read locally but
not changed or checked in to the master repository.
When you execute the function, a copy wizard guides you through the process.
Like the check-in wizard , the copy wizard lets you automatically add all dependent
objects to the copy list.
Prerequisites
To be able to copy an object, you must be working online or have set up a
connection to the master repository. To do this, choose Connect in the master
repository.
Procedure
1. In the master repository, select one or more objects for copying.
2. Choose Copy.
The dialog box Copy Wizard appears.
3. If you want dependent objects automatically added to the copy list,
select the relevant indicator.
4. Choose Continue.
5. Check, and where relevant, modify the list of objects for transport inthe dialog box that appears.
6. Choose Start.
Caution: During the copying process, the system may detect
a version conflict. Such a conflict occurs when you copy an
object for which there is another version stored locally. In this
case, you must select the version that you want to use in the
course you are editing locally.
Result
The objects to be transported have been copied in read-only format to the localrepository.
358 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 367/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
Managing Content
Prerequisites
Checked in, usually older versions of learning nets should be excluded from
reuse, so that the learners who start courses affected in this way do not access the
obsolete courses.
Procedure
Figure 192: Preventing Objects from Being Reused
1. By flagging the outdated course as "obsolete" in the master repository, you
prevent it from being re-booked in the future: Select the learning net –>
right click –>"Mark as obsolete (XX)" .
Figure 193: Renewing the Validity of Excluded Objects
2. Objects that have previously been excluded from reuse can be allowed for
reuse at a later stage by clicking on Mark as valid (see graphic above).
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 359
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 368/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Result
Marking an object as “obsolete” has a number of consequences, particularly
technical ones.
• The courses are not "deleted", they are simply not offered as content for
a course. From a technical point of view, they remain as versions in the
Content Management System, but are not displayed as possible learning
nets for assignment to course types.
• Courses that have already been booked in the Learning Portal still link to
this learning net.
• This content is no longer available when you create new course types or
change existing ones.
If you permit objects to be used again, users on the Learning Portal can access
them again.
360 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 369/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
Content Search
Prerequisites
The full text index search must be installed. You can then search in the master
repository not only in texts but also using metadata for the respective learning nets.
Figure 194: Full Text Search in the Master Repository Using the Repository
Explorer
You have to define the type for this metadata (author, keywords, validity, and so
on) and their classification asmandatory fields and optional fields beforehand in
SAP ERP2005 HR Customizing for the Authoring Environment, so that authors
can use it when creating content.
Procedure
Figure 195: Full Text Search in the Repository Explorer - Metadata
1. The author maintains the metadata when creating learning nets. Mandatoryfields must always be filled. If they have not been maintained, this leads to
error messages when checking in.
2. In the second tab page of the search you can also find all the learning nets
and objects that contain a particular keyword (where-used-list). On the third
tab page you can search for learning objectives.
Continued on next page
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 361
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 370/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Result
You can further restrict the results of the search for learning nets and objects.
For example, you can base your search on a particular language, for objects
that have already been published, or for the object type (learning nets, reusable
content sources). You can branch from the hitlist directly to the objects found in
the Repository Explorer.
Figure 196: Metadata Search Results
362 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 371/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
Content Versioning
Use
If an administrator changes a learning net in the Authoring Environment, the
administrator can indicate whether the changes are minor changes (layout,
spelling) or important changes (content, tests) after checking in the net.
Procedure
Figure 197: Type of Change to the Learning Net
1. You can view or change the attributes of the learning objects in the local or
master repository from within the repository explorer. You can store the
change information under Publishing data.
Result
This information plays a central role if you want to provide the learner with an
updated version of a web-based training course in the Learning Portal. Depending
on the Customizing settings in the SAP system and the learning net, the changes
made can have different effects and require different responses, for example:
• The learner is automatically provided with the latest version. The previous
version and the learner's learning progress is deleted! In this case, learners
receive a message in the Learning Portal telling them about the change.
• Learners can decide for themselves whether they want to continue with
the older version and exit the web-based training course they have started.
This option is useful if only minor changes to the content have been made
by the administrator.
• Furthermore, the learner can decide whether the changes represent value
for money. This means that in the event of a course update, for example, an
increased charge is also due for the latest version.
Figure 198: SAP Customizing – Possible System Responses to Changed
Content Versions
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 363
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 372/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
364 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 373/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
Exercise 10: Publishing with the
Repository Explorer Exercise Objectives
After completing this exercise, you will be able to:
• Differentiate between your local repository and the master repository and
between “releasing” and “publishing” a WBT.
Business Example
You are a course author and want to ensure that your content appears in the
Learning Portal, and is also available to other content authors.
Task:
You now want to make the learning net you created available as a WBT in the
learning portal. To do so, you have to publish your learning net in the master
repository.
1. Start the Repository Explorer and log on to the main repository with your
ERP2005 logon data.
2. Check your learning net into the master repository. Enter your own name
as the author. Note the calculated learning time.
3. Release the learning net. Note the change to the icon for your learning net inthe master repository.
4. Open the master data catalog on the back end system and start creating a new
WBT. Can you already create a relationship to your new learning net? Do not
close the transaction; instead, go back directly to the Repository Explorer.
5. Publish your learning net and create a WBT in the back end system with
your learning net as content. Be creative when you enter the descriptions
and other values.
6. Find and book your WBT in the Learning Portal. Start it in the Content
Player.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 365
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 374/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Solution 10: Publishing with the
Repository Explorer Task:
You now want to make the learning net you created available as a WBT in the
learning portal. To do so, you have to publish your learning net in the master
repository.
1. Start the Repository Explorer and log on to the main repository with your
ERP2005 logon data.
a) Start the Repository Explorer either with Windows→ Programs→
SAP Learning Solution or directly from the Authoring Environment
→ Tools→ Start.
Click “Connect” in the right-hand frame. You are prompted to enter
the data to log on to the back end system. After you have logged on
successfully, the learning objects from the master repository appear
in the right-hand frame.
2. Check your learning net into the master repository. Enter your own name
as the author. Note the calculated learning time.
a) Select the anchor file for your learning net (extension .crs) in the
left-hand frame of the Explorer and click the Check In button. A
prompt appears asking whether you want to define additional attributes
for the learning net. The learning time is calculated automatically basedon the metadata maintained for the objects.
3. Release the learning net. Note the change to the icon for your learning net in
the master repository.
a) Right-click the anchor file you just checked in (it is located under the
same path is in the local repository). Choose “Release”.
4. Open the master data catalog on the back end system and start creating a new
WBT. Can you already create a relationship to your new learning net? Do not
close the transaction; instead, go back directly to the Repository Explorer.
a) No. A release merely enables the other authors to access the checked-inobjects.
Continued on next page
366 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 375/394
HR270 Lesson: Repository Explorer
5. Publish your learning net and create a WBT in the back end system with
your learning net as content. Be creative when you enter the descriptions
and other values.
a) The publication process is similar to the release process – you can see
the corresponding indicators in the icon for the learning net.
b) You can now create the desired relationship in the transaction you
started for creating a WBT. Make the usual entries, like you learned
in unit 6, and save your entries.
6. Find and book your WBT in the Learning Portal. Start it in the Content
Player.
a) You hopefully remember what you called your new WBT and can find
it in the HR270 folder. Continue as usual.
Caution: Congratulations! You have now created a learning
net as a content author published the content internally,
and created a new WBT for this content as a training
administrator. You then booked it as a learner in your new
Learning Portal and processed it.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 367
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 376/394
Unit 10: SAP LS Authoring Environment – Repository Explorer HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Define the purpose of a local repository
• Create a local repository
• List the tasks of the master repository
368 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 377/394
HR270 Unit Summary
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Explain the process-related difference between online and offline working
• Distinguish between the procedure for working online and offline
• Define the purpose of a local repository
• Create a local repository
• List the tasks of the master repository
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 369
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 378/394
Unit Summary HR270
370 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 379/394
Unit 11Additional Information
Unit Overview
You will receive a general overview of the topics covered in the course.
Unit Objectives
After completing this unit, you will be able to:
• Explain the fundamental principle on which the SAP Business Information
Warehouse (BIW) works
• Describe the visual representation of reporting in the SAP BIW
• Name the features of the new correspondence concept.
Unit Contents
Lesson: Reporting with Business Intelligence ..............................372Lesson: Correspondence in the SAP Learning Solution...................381
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 371
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 380/394
Unit 11: Additional Information HR270
Lesson: Reporting with Business Intelligence
Lesson Overview
This lesson provides a brief overview of the options and modes of representation
for the SAP Learning Solution using the Business Information Warehouse in the
standard system.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Explain the fundamental principle on which the SAP Business Information
Warehouse (BIW) works
• Describe the visual representation of reporting in the SAP BIW
Business Example
As a training administrator you are already experienced in dealing with the
standard reporting tools in your Learning Management system.
It is your task to take a closer look at a solution that also allows occasional users,
in particular managers, to compare existing training data and derive correlations
from it that could provide the basis for strategic decisions.
A visually appealing representation of the evaluation in the standard browser
is particularly important here.
372 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 381/394
HR270 Lesson: Reporting with Business Intelligence
Structure of the Application
Figure 199: Structure of a BI Application in the LSO
In the Business Information Warehouse, data exists in the form of InfoCubes. TheInfoCubes themselves are structured in such a way that they hold information
ready for specific queries that can be started from the browser. One particular
aspect of these InfoCubes is that they enable you to derive relationships between
various sets of data.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 373
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 382/394
Unit 11: Additional Information HR270
Figure 200: Holding Data in InfoCubes
Each InfoCube holds key figures in such a way that they can be read in aggregated
form in accordance with particular characteristics. Each part of the InfoCube
stands for a key figure-characteristic combination.
The queries are processed by the Business Warehouse Server and the results are
converted to HTML format, for example, so that they can be viewed in the browser.
374 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 383/394
HR270 Lesson: Reporting with Business Intelligence
Possible Data Output
Figure 201: Queries as a Form of Data Request
The data the user can call depends on which queries were previously defined and published. 18 queries are included in the standard SAP Learning Solution. You
can use the Business Explorer to create additional queries, if required.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 375
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 384/394
Unit 11: Additional Information HR270
Figure 202: Queries in the SAP Learning Solution
Within the SAP Learning Solution you can acquire detailed information about
learning behavior, success rates and more using the interface to the Business
Information Warehouse (see graphic above).
376 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 385/394
HR270 Lesson: Reporting with Business Intelligence
Figure 203: Attendance Statistics
A few examples are illustrated in the following section. An entire course could be
devoted to the topic of reporting using the BIW, just for HCM alone.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 377
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 386/394
Unit 11: Additional Information HR270
Figure 204:
Figure 205:
378 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 387/394
HR270 Lesson: Reporting with Business Intelligence
Figure 206:
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 379
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 388/394
Unit 11: Additional Information HR270
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Explain the fundamental principle on which the SAP Business Information
Warehouse (BIW) works
• Describe the visual representation of reporting in the SAP BIW
380 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 389/394
HR270 Lesson: Correspondence in the SAP Learning Solution
Lesson: Correspondence in the SAP Learning Solution
Lesson Overview
Prospects - new correspondence options with the LSO 600.
Lesson Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to:
• Name the features of the new correspondence concept.
Business Example
As a training administrator you know how to send standard letters with MS Word,for example, in order to send invitations to participants. Until now, you have
chosen to do using standard e-mail, also because you could control the layout
better. As part of the process of implementing a new LMS, you are considering
whether technical advances might offer you other options.
The New Correspondence Concept
Correspondence covers a very large area in Training Administration and is dealt
with in the relevant course. Attendance bookings and confirmations, course
cancellations, rebookings, date changes for bookings and so on normally go hand
in hand with a specific form of notification. LSO 600 offers a new correspondence
concept that can be implemented as an alternative to the normal correspondence
concept. As part of the new “request based correspondence”, special settings allow
users the option of correcting and supplementing the content of correspondence
before it is created.
Figure 207:
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 381
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 390/394
Unit 11: Additional Information HR270
Correspondence can either be triggered manually by a training administrator, or
a learner triggers automatic correspondence by way of a self service action. In
both cases, you can define in Customizing whether additional information is to beadded and the data checked, or whether the document should be created without
additional, external assistance.
If the correspondence is to be edited by another employee, the correspondence
data is arranged in a worklist that the employee in question can then process.
After checking the date, the employee then triggers the creation of the message.
Various output media options are available:
• Fax
• SAP Mail
• Text message
• Printed document
Hint: As well as “Queuing and Editing”, the obvious advantage of the
new correspondence options is the standard use of e-mails with pdf
attachments.
Delimitation of SAPscript
Note that request-based correspondence in the SAP Learning Solution is a new
function based on a different data model and a different data store to that of theSAPscript.based correspondence from the previous versions of Training and Event
Management.
Request-based correspondence and SAPscript-based correspondence are two
independent applications in the SAP Learning Solution. This means:
• They have no shared Customizing
• They have no shared forms
• They have no shared output logs, logs of correspondence to be output, or
error logs.
382 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 391/394
HR270 Lesson: Correspondence in the SAP Learning Solution
Lesson Summary
You should now be able to:• Name the features of the new correspondence concept.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 383
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 392/394
Unit Summary HR270
Unit Summary
You should now be able to:
• Explain the fundamental principle on which the SAP Business Information
Warehouse (BIW) works
• Describe the visual representation of reporting in the SAP BIW
• Name the features of the new correspondence concept.
384 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 2006/Q2
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 393/394
HR270 Course Summary
Course Summary
You should now be able to:
• Describe the business processes of (Blended) Training Management, the
Learning Portal and the Authoring Environment
• Define the structure of the SAP Learning Solution and the interplay between
the various components
Related Information
• Use a URL or cross-reference tag to point out additional information that
the participants may find useful, such as Web sites or white papers. Delete
this if not applicable.
2006/Q2 © 2006 SAP AG. All rights reserved. 385
7/15/2019 HR270 en SAP Learning Solution Overview Participant Handbook 2006
http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/hr270-en-sap-learning-solution-overview-participant-handbook-2006 394/394
Course Summary HR270